mi 


*M^Tv3^ 


fe-A-',     'S    5- 


THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 

OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


S. 


md 


ete 
jrt- 
ith 

!tu- 
nu- 
for 
ind 
no. 

Ex- 
for 
000 
iso, 
les, 
les. 


ry. 

oer, 

NE8 

s  of 
ent 


of 

_^  tc., 

at  one  view  ;  also.  Complete  Lists  of  Word-signs  and  iJon- 
tracted  Word-forms,  witii  Rules  for  Contracting  Words  for 
the  Use  of  Writers  of  all  Styles  of  Phonography.  12mo. 
Paper,  25  cents. 

VI.  The  Phonog:raphic  Reader  and  Writer.  Con- 
taining Heading  Exercises,  wiili  Translations  on  opposite 
pages,  which  form  Writing  Kxercises.  12mo.  4S  pages. 
2»  cents. 

VH.  Writing  Exercises.  ■  For  gaining  Speed  in  Phonog- 
laphy,  the  Kxercises  are  printed  couiiguou.s  lo  the  lines  on 
which  tliey  are  to  be  written,  and  are  interspersed  wiih 
Word-signs,  Phrases,  and  Sentences,  beginning  with  the 
first  lesson.    New  edition.    64  pages.    25  cents. 

VIII.  SUorthand  Dictation  Exercises.  Counted  and 
timed  for  .W,  75,  100, 1'25,  and  150  words  per  minute,  for  ad- 
vanced Learners  in  any  System  ol  Shorthand,  and  for  Type- 
writers.   12mo,    72  pages.    25  cents. 

Jj^--l".v  of  the  above  booka  fenl  by  mail  prepaid,  on  receini 
of  the  price. 

ROBERT   CLARKE  &   CO.,   Publishers, 

Ciuciunati. 


,** 


^J 


Digitizedby  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/americanmanualOOIongiata 


AIVLERICAN 


fl^Nn^Ii-^OP  ^PpONOGl^PPY 


A    COMPLETE   GUIDE 


TO  THK  ACQUISITION  OF 


?itmai|'s  J'lioucjjr  ^IpHl^nnh  ^^^ 


WITHOUT  OR  WITH  A  TEACHER. 


-=<      By  ELIAS  LONGLEY.  y^ 


/''.  r  I  >°'V'V'  ~""j^j^h^^' • ' '  ^' 


CINCINNATI: 
TvOBERT  CLARKE  &  CO. 

1891. 


^ 


Entered  arconliiig  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  tlie 

year  1879, 

BY    ELIAS    LONGLEY, 

In  the  Offlee  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at 

Washington,  D.  C. 


♦^ 


♦^ 


.-»»€' 


IS  f  / . 


^ndnxi^. 


Twenty-five  years  have  elapsed  since  tlie  author  published 
his  first  edition  of  tiie  AjrERicAX  Manual  of  Phonogra- 
phy. During  that  time  many  changes  in  Phonography  have 
been  pro^wsed;  some  have  been  adopted,  and  become  per- 
manent features  in  the  writing  of  nearly  all  phonographic 
experts;  while  others,  though  still  embodied  in  the  instruc- 
tion books  of  their  respective  authors,  are  generally  rejected 
by  their  students  as  soon  as  they  become  familiar  with  the 
corresponding  features  of  other  works. 

As  Phonography  now  stands  before  the  public,  in  this 
country,  it  has  no  generally  recognized  exponent.  It  is 
Lo!  here,  and  lo!  there ;  and  nobody  knows  who  is  the  true 
phonographic  prophet.  A  young  man,  or  young  lady,  wishes 
to  learn  the  coveted  art,  and  by  chance,  or  on  the  recommen- 
dation of  some  friend,  purchases  one  of  the  instruction  books 
in  the  market.  Before  mastering  the  system  as  presented  in 
its  piiges,  he  or  she  is  told  by  some  other  friend  that  there  is 
a  better  system,  in  some  other  book ;  and  forthwith  that 
other  l)ook  is  bought,  and  the  learner  soon  becomes  con- 
founded with  the  conflicting  systems,  or  conflicting  modifica- 
tions of  the   original   system. 

The  fact  most  to  be  regretted  in  this  connection  is,  that  all 
the  American  modifications  of  Phonography  differ  as  widely 
from  the  present  system  of  Isaac  Pitman,  the  original  English 
autlior,  as  they  do  from  each  other.  In  England  there  is  but 
one  system,  and  harmony  prevails  among  her  many  thousand 
phonographic  writers.  This  is  not  so  much  the  result,  we 
learn,  of  unity  of  views,  as  it  is  the  happy  outcome  of  obe- 


452v:.33 


PREFACE. 


dience  to  the  law  of  copy-right,  which  secures  to  Mr.  Pitman 
the  sole  right  to  publish  phonographic  books  in  Her  Majesty's 
kingdom. 

For  the  purpose  of  exerting  what  little  influence  he  can  in 
the  way  of  restoring  harmony  among  American  phonogra- 
phers,  and  unity  in  the  style  of  writing  that  shall  be  acquired 
by  those  who  hereafter  study  the  art,  the  writer  has  carefully 
and  hopefully  prepared  the  following  pages.  In  them  he 
presents  all  the  new  features  that  have  stood  the  test,  for 
many  years,  of  both  experiment  and  practical  experience  ;  and 
he  also  exhibits  others  in  reference  to  which  there  is  a  differ- 
ence of  opinion,  and  which  are  used  only  by  limited  numbers 
of  phonographic  writers.  Thus  the  student  who  acquires  his 
knowledge  of  Phonography  through  this  manual,  will  become 
familiar  with  the  distinctive  features  of  other  authors,  and 
be  able  to  read  the  writing  of  phonographers  of  any  school. 

As  an  Eclectic  System  of  Phoxckjraphy,  therefore, 
this  Manual  is  presented  to  a  discriminating  public.  It  is 
the  result  of  careful  investigation  and  exi^eriment.  and  of 
long  practice  with  the  reporter's  pen;  in  addition  to  which, 
might  be  added,  a  continuous  correspondence,  for  a  quarter 
of  a  century,  with  the  most  critical  phonographers,  from  the 
esteemed  and  now  venerable  author,  Isajic  Pitman,  down  to 
the  latest  self-styled  "inventor"  of  "some  new  contrivances" 
of  his  own.  In  view  of  the  fact  that  for  so  long  a  time 
thousands  of  skillful  Englishmen  and  ingenious  Yankees 
have  been  doing  their  best  at  improving  Phonography,  it  is 
scarcely  possible  for  anything  new,  and  also  valuable,  to  lie 
hereafter  discovered  and  rendered  serviceable,  in  the  use  of 
the  very  limited  number  of  straight  and  curved  lines,  circles, 
hooks,  dots  and  dashes,  that  are  available  for  the  pen.  Hence 
it  may  safely  be  presumed  that  the  phonographic  art  has 
reached  the  ultima  thule  of  i)erfectiou. 

As  to  the  method  in  which  the  art  is  presented  in  the  fol- 
lowing pages,  but  few  words  need  be  said.  It  is  in  the  main 
the  same  as  that  employed  in  the  old,  and  always  jwpular, 
American  Manual  of  Phonography.  The  first  lessons 
are  rendered  still  more  simple  and  easy  of  comprehension  by 


PREFACE. 


the  introduction  of  only  portions  of  the  alphabet  at  a  time, 
and  by  interlined  translations  of  the  shorthand  in  common 
print,  both  of  which  are  features  peculiar  to  this  book  alone. 

The  exceeding  brevity  of  Isaac  Pitman's  Manual,  which 
contains  but  G4  small  pages,  has  been  avoided ;  while  the 
great  prolixity  of  certain  American  authors,  whose  large  and 
crowded  pages  extend  to  250  and  300,  has  been  as  judiciously 
guarded  against.  In  this  convenient  little  book  the  time  and 
memory  of  the  pupil  are  not  taxed  with  unnecessary  and  ijn- 
practicable  discussions  of  philosophical  points  in  relation  to 
language  and  its  visual  representation.  He  is  not  deterred 
from  beginning  the  study,  by  a  formidable  volume,  nor 
discouraged  by  the  slow  progress  of  memorizing  page  after 
page  of  abstract  principles  and  rules  before  becoming 
charmed  with  the  practice  based  upon  them.  In  these  in- 
viting pages  principle  and  practice  go  hand  in  hand. 

Immediately  following  the  explanation  of  each  new  princi- 
ple is  a  Reading  Exercise,  embracing,  as  much  as  possible, 
words  illustrative  of  the  preceding  text.  This  is  followed  by 
an  Exercise  for  Writing,  which  should  be  written  before  pro- 
gressing further,  while  the  manner  in  which  the  words  are  to 
be  formed  are  fresh  in  the  mind.  Then,  at  the  close  of  each 
lesson,  is  a  general  Writing  Exercise,  embodying,  besides  the 
principles  just  presented,  all  that  has  previously  been  learned. 
This  should  be  written  by  each  pupil,  during  the  intervals  be- 
tween the  meetings  of  the  class;  and  at  the  next  recitation, 
the  pupils  should  exchange  their  manuscripts  with  each 
other,  and  then  read,  each  a  sentence  in  turn,  from  their 
written  exercises.  They  might  then  be  passed  to  the  teacher 
for  his  correction. 

Another  leading  feature  is  such  an  arrangement  of  the 
lessons  that  no  word,  or  class  of  words,  is  required  to  be 
written  until  the  principle  is  explained  by  which  they  are 
written  in  their  most  approved  forms.  By  this  means  the 
student  is  not  compelled  to  spend  his  ti4ne  in  learning  to 
write  certain  words',  and  then  suffer  the  discouragement  of 
having  to  drop  and  forget  the  forms  thus  learned,  and  famil- 
iarize  himself  with  new   and   better  ones.      What  is   once 


J 


b  PREFACE. 

learned  in  this  book,  remains  a  fixed  fact  with  the  pupil  in 
all  his  after  use  of  the  system. 

The  Review  at  the  close  of  each  lesson  will  be  of  great 
assistance  to  the  teacher,  es})ecially  to  the  inexperienced,  in 
questioning  his  class  as  to  what  they  have  gone  over ;  it  will 
also  be  useful  to  the  private  learner,  filling  the  place,  almost, 
of  an  oral  instructor.  The  questions  may  be  asked  the  chiss 
either  collectively  or  individually ;  the  latter  is  generally  the 
better  way.  It  would  be  well,  as  often  as  convenient,  to 
have  the  pupils  illustrate  their  answers  on  the  black-board. 

The  pupil  is  advised  to  read  the  following  Introduction 
carefully  through,  in  order  that  he  may  get  a  general  idea 
of  the  phonetic  theory,  before  beginning  the  practice  and 
study  of  the  phonographic  art.  He  will  then  be  prepared  to 
make  more  rapid  and  satisfactory  progress  than  he  would 
by  commencing  with  the  first  lesson  proper. 


r 


atlrakclmtt* 


bljC  IJiuetgCuil^  ©0ntttn|  has  undoubtedly  ccliiJsed  all 
preceding  time  in  the  number  and  value  of  its  discoveries  and 
iuventiuns.  In  mechanics,  manufactures,  agriculture,  and 
the  arts,  what  changes  have  taken  place  even  in  the  memory 
of  our  fathers!  Scarcely  anything  is  done  now  as  it  was  in 
the  days  of  their  lx)yhood.  New  methods  and  new  machinery 
are  accomplishing  twenty-five,  fifty,  or  a  hundred  per  cent, 
more  in  the  same  time,  than  was  accomplished  by  our  fore- 
fathers, and  at  very  much  less  expense.  The  laborious 
and  tedious  process  of  shaping  wood  and  stone,  iron  and  other 
metals,  by  the  carpenter,  mason,  and  machinist,  are  alihost 
forgotten  by  the  workmen  who  feed  and  watch  the  wonder- 
ful machines  that  saw,  and  plane,  and  turn,  and  mould,  l>y 
the  power  of  steam,  the  multitudinous  forms  needed  in  archi- 
tecture, mechanism,  and  the  various  arts  and  sciences. 

Modes  of  travel  and  of  mental  communication  have  in 
like  manner  changed.  Steam  vessels  and  railroads  have 
superseded  the  sail  and  tow-boat  and  the  stage-coach,  and 
we  now  travel  more  than  twice  as  fast,  and  far  more  comfort- 
ably than  did  our  fathers;  while  the  electric  telegraph  and 
the  telephone  have  far  out-stripped,  in  speed  and  usefulness, 
correspondence  by  mail. 

While  the  transmission  of  words  and  facts  to  distant  points 
has  been  astonishingly  facilitated,  by  late  inventions,  the 
record  of  original  thought,  its  transfer  from  mind  to  pajier, 
has  not  been  correspondingly'improved,  until  by  the  inven- 
tion and  perfection  of  Piionography  such  i)erfect  facility  in 
thought  rei)resentation  has  been  rendered  possible.    The  pho- 


INTRODUCTION. 


nographic  art  is  certainly  a  boon  of  inestimable  value  to  the 
human  mind,  rendered  indispensable  by  the  rapidity  with 
which  thought  may  be  transmitted  to  the  farthest  ends 
of  the  earth.  It  presents  to  the  student,  as  well  as  the 
scholar,  an  alphabet  of  letters  so  simple  and  facile  that 
he  who  uses  them  may  readily  keep  pace  with  the  fastest 
speaker — affording  a  system  of  writing  as  much  superior  to 
that  of  the  old  script  alphabet,  as  railroads  are  to  the  old- 
style  stage  coaches  or  telegraphs  to  the  postman's  plodding 
ponv. 

It  is  not  our  wish  to  underrate  the  value  of  the  pres- 
ent system  of  writing;  it  has  been  of  great  service  in  its 
time,  having  done  much  in  the  way  of  civilizing  and  en- 
lightening the  races  of  men.  But  the  state  of  things  in 
the  scientific  world  demands  a  change  in  the  character  of 
our  written  language.  Science  is  a  stern  ruler;  her  laws 
encircle  every  art,  and  although  for  a  long  time  they  may 
remain  undiscovered  or  not  applied,  yet  as  the  world  pro- 
gres.ses  in  knowledge  and  learns  wisdom  from  experience, 
it  will  cause  them  to  be  developed,  and  future  generations 
will  derive  the  advantages  of  conforming  to  them.  These 
facts  have  been  illustrated  in  the  various  improvements 
to  which  we  have  alluded ;  and  they  are  still  to  be  ex- 
I^ected  in  such  departments  as  have  not  yet  undergone 
the  remodeling  process  of  modern  ingenuity.  They  take 
their  turn  in  the  great  circle  of  progression ;  and  it  is  the 
object  of  the  present  work  to  demonstrate  the  laws  that 
apply  to  the  art  of  writing,  us  required  at  this  stage  of  tlie 
world's  history. 

The  spirit  of  our  age  demands  two  new  features  in  the  art 
of  writing:  First,  Speed  in  its  cjcecution;  second,  System  in  its 
orthofjraphij.  In  treating  of  the  first  desideratum  we  shall 
briefly  refer  to  the  alphabet,  now  in  use,  and  the  habits  of 
writing  it  requires. 

Like  the  ancient  implements  of  industry  and  modes  of 
labor,  the  alphabet  of  our  father^was  constructed  at  a  time 
when  the  ingenuity  of  man  had  not  been  brought  into  full 


I>vTUODUCriON.  9 


play.  The  letters  are  complex,  aiid  the  use  of  them  cumber- 
some in  the  extreme.  To  illustrate:  take  the  letter  a  for 
example;  to  make  this  letter  the  lingers  have  to  perform  four 
inflections  or  movements,  while  it  represents  but  a  simple 
sound;  in  making  the  letter  m  seven  inflections  are  re- 
quired, while  it,  too,  represents  but  one  sound;  and  every 
letter  of  the  old  alphabet  is  thus  complex,  to  a  greater  or  less 
degree,  although  they  are  designed  each  to  represent  but  a 
single  sound. 

Now,  while  there  is  comjflexity  in  the  art  of  writing,  in 
spoken  language  the  organs  of  siieech  perform  but  one  move- 
ment in  the  euunciation  of  each  sound;  and  hence  the  labor 
of  the  ijenman  is  four  or  five  times  as  great  as  that  of  the 
speaker.  While  the  latter  is  moving  ofl"  freely,  as  on  the 
wings  of  the  wind,  the  former  is  trudging  at  the  snail's 
pace,  weary  and  provoked  at  the  contrast. 

The  object  to  be  accomplished,  therefore,  is  to  present  an 
ulpiiabet,  each  letter  of  which  can  be  written  by  one  inflec- 
tion of  the  pen,  so  that  the  writer'  need  no  longer  be  four 
times  distanced  by  the  moderate  speaker;  and  if  the  reader 
will  follow  us  through  this  book,  he  will  see  that  the  system 
we  are  about  to  develop  more  than  meets  this  requirement. 

But  a  greater  difiiculty,  if  possible,  than  the  mere  substi- 
tution of  a  new  alpiiabet,  is  to  be  overcome.  The  orthogra- 
phy employed  in  using  the  old  alphabet  is  nearly  as  cumbrous 
as  the  formation  of  its  letters;  while  its  want  of  system 
makes  it  a  study  of  many  years  to  memorize  the  spelling  of 
the  fifty  or  eighty  thousand  words  in  our  language. 

Thus,  take  the  sound  of  a;  if  we  had  nothing  to  do,  in 
order  to  represent  it  in  our  common  writing  but  to  write  the 
one  letter  called  a,  the  evil  would  be  trifling  compared  with 
what  it  is.  But  we  more  frequently  have  to  write  two  or 
three,  or  even  four  letters  to  represent  this  one  sound.  It  has, 
in  fact,  thirty-four  different  modes  of  representation,  consist- 
ing of  various  combinations  of  nine  difterent  letters,  a  few 
only  of  which  we  have  room  to  exhibit.  Thus,  aa,  as  in 
Afiwn;  ai,  as  in  \xtln;  ai;/ aa  in  campa/(/n;  ai(/h,  as  in  straiyht; 
ay,  as  in   mayor ;  ei<;,  Jis   in  reiyn ;  eiyhe,  as  in  vfdghcd,  &c. 


J 


10  INTRODUCTION. 


Now  common  sense,  as  weTl  as  the  laws  of  science,  suggests 
that  the  sound  of  a  in  each  and  all  tliese  should  l>e  written 
with  the  same  letter.  When  this  shall  be  done,  more  than 
two-thirds  of  the  labor  of  representing  this  sound  will  l>e 
saved ;  buf  by  substituting  a  new  letter  that  can  be  made 
with  but  one  movement  of  the  pen  instead  of  the  four  that 
a  requires,  and  of  the  four  times  four  that  several  of  the 
above  combinations  require,  nine-tcntha  of  this  labor  will  be 
avoided.  In  writing  the  letters  to  represent  the  sound  a 
in  these  seven  Avords,  instead  of  making  seventy  inflections  of 
the  |)en,  we  will  have  to  make  but  seven  ! 

The  sound  of  e  is  represented  in  forty  different  ways.  Ex- 
amples: e,  as  in  me;  ee,  as  in  meet;  ea,  as  in  each;  ea-ue,  as  in 
leag«e;  eye,  as  in  keyed;  eig,sis  in  seiguor;  etgfi,  as  in  \jeigh; 
i-e,  as  in  manne;  ic,  as  in  field;  etc.  We  need  not  repeat  that 
the  sound  of  e  in  each  of  these  words  should  be  represented 
by  the  same  letter  ;  or  that  by  substituting  for  the  complex 
letter  e  a  simple  character  that  can  be  made  with  one  motion 
of  the  pon,  seven-eightiis  or  nine-tenths  of  the  labor  in  writ- 
ing would  be  saved.  These  are  facts  that  are  evident,  after 
tlie  illustrations  are  presented.  And  we  might  tlius  illustrate 
the  unscientific  mode  of  representing  nearly  every  word  in 
our  language,  with  equally  deplorable  results.  But  we  will 
only  state  the  melancholy  fact,  that  the  various  sounds  cm- 
ployed  in  speaking  the  English  language  are  each  represented 
in  from  four  to  forty  ways,  and  that  in  the  large  majority  of 
cases  two  or  more  letters  are  required  to  do  the  service.  It  is 
also  true,  that  there  is  no  letter  in  the  alphabet  that  uni- 
formly represents  the  same  sound;  thus,  a  has  a  different 
sound  in  each  of  the  following  words:  «te,  at,  all,  are,  any; 
and  e  has  a  different  sound  in  each  of  the  following  words : 
eel,  ell,  vein,  verse,  height,  etc. 

The  consequence  of  this  want  of  system  is,  in  the  language 
of  a  distinguished  writer  on  the  subject  of  education,  that 
"reading  is  the  most  difficult  of  human  attainments."  And, 
as  a  further  consequence,  one-third  of  the  population  of 
England  are  unable  to  read,  and  one-half  unable  to  write; 
while  in  the  United  States,  the  li umber  of  adult  white  per- 


r 


INTRODUCTIOX.  11 


sons  who  can  neither  read  nor  write,  is  one  to  every  twenty 
who  can  ;  and  this  wide-spread  ignorance  must  continue  un- 
til the  rudiments  of  education  are  simplified.  Such  incon- 
sistencies and  mischievous  errors  as  we  have  referred  to,  are 
not  in  harmony  with  the  developments  of  order  and  science 
in  most  other  branches  of  industry  and  art,  and  hence  they 
must  be  superseded  by  something  truer  and  more  expedi- 
tious; or,  if  not  superseded,  we  must  use  the  more  speedy 
and  economical  system  in  connection  with  the  old,  as  steam- 
boats, railroads  and  telegraphs  are  used,  conjointly  with  the 
old  modes  of  conveyance. 

The  term  Phonetic  is  derived  from  the  Greek  word  phone, 
sound.  A  phonetic  alphabet,  therefore,  is  one  which,  refer- 
ring solely  to  speech,  derives  all  its  laws  from  a  consideration 
of  the  elements  of  speech.  To  illustrate  what  we  mean  by  the 
phrase  "elements  of  speech,"  we  have  but  to  ask  the  reader 
to  adjust  his  lips  to  a  nnmd  position  and  deliver  the  voice  as 
he  would  commence  to  speak  the  words  ode,  oak,  own.  Now 
this  same  sound  is  heard  in  thoustinds  of  words  in  our  lan- 
guage, and  is  what  we  call  an  element  of  speech.  Another 
element  is  heard  in  the  commencement  of  the  word  ooze  and 
at  the  termination  of  the  word  who.  In  pronouncing  the 
words  see,  say,  saw,  so,  we  hear,  at  the  beginning  of  each  of 
them,  the  same  kind  of  a  sound,  namely  a  hiss,  which  is  also 
an  element  of  speech,  for  it  frequently  combines  with  other 
sounds  to  make  words.  By  analyzing  all  the  words  in  the 
English  language,  it  has  been  found  that  it  is  constituted  of 
but  forty-three  elementary  sounds;  or,  to  be  more  precise, 
thirty-nine  simple  sounds  and  four  compound  ones,  formed 
by  the  close  union  of  certain  simple  sounds,  which  it  is  con- 
venient to  consider  as  elements.  Tn  si>eaking,  therefore,  our 
words  consist  simply  in  the  utterance  of  one  of  these,  or  a 
combination  of  two  or  more  of  them ;  and  in  writing  these 
words,  common  sense  would  suggest  that  each  element  should 
be  represented  by  a  single  letter,  that  should  never  stand 
for  any  other  sound. 


r 


12  INTRODUCTION. 


It  is  supposed  the  original  Phoenician  alphabet,  from  Avliich 
our  present  alphabet  is  remotely  derived,  was  phonetic ;  tliat 
is,  it  represented  the  elements  of  speech  in  such  a  manner 
that  when  the  sounds  of  a  word  were  heard  the  writer  knew 
immediately  what  letters  to  use,  and  when  he  saw  the  letters 
lie  knew  at  once  what  sounds  he  was  to  utter.  But  when 
this  alphabet  was  adopted  by  the  Greeks  and  Romans,  who 
used  sounds  unknown  to  the  Phoenicians,  many  of  the  old 
letters  were  necessarily  used  to  represent  new  sounds  as  well 
as  old  ones,  so  that  there  was  no  longer  any  very  strict  ac- 
cordance between  the  sounds  and  letters  of  words.  But 
when  other  European  nations,  including  the  English,  adopted 
the  Romanic  alphabet,  and  used  it  in  very  different  ways, 
insomuch  that  no  one  could  guess  what  sound  should  be 
attributed  to  any  one  letter,  almost  all  trace  of  the  pho- 
netic nature  of  the  alphabet  was  lost.  And  hence  the  de- 
plorable state  of  English  spelling  and  writing,  as  depicted 
in  previous  pages,  which,  in  few  words,  is  so  bad  that  no 
one  can  tell  the  soiind  of  an  unknown  word  from  its 
spelling,  or  the  spelling  of  a  new  word  from  its  sound. 

Phonetic  sjM^lling,  therefore,  is  no  new  thing,  and  the 
etforts  of  writing  and  spelling  reformers  is  simply  an  at- 
tempt to  place  the  representation  of  the  English  language 
on  the  same  rational  basis  that  the  most  classic  of  the  ancient 
languages  stood,  and  in  addition  thereto  to  afford  the  means 
for  the  most  rapid  Avriting  that  it  is  possible  to  attain.  No 
further  argument,  therefore,  should  be  required,  in  presenting 
a  system  so  accordant  with  scientific  truth  and  utility. 

And  yet,  in  this  age  of  improvement  and  scientific  exac- 
tion, when  from  all  the  universities,  colleges,  and  other  rep- 
resentatives of  knowledge  and  literary  judgment,  the  de- 
mand for  an  enlarged  alphabet  and  reformed  orthography  is 
being  pressed  upon  public  attention,  an  author  ventures  to 
shock  all  sense  of  consistency  by  bringing  out  a  system  of 
brief  writing   based   on   the  old  absurd  orthography.*     His 

*Cross's  Eclectic  Shorthand;  Chicago:     S.  C.  Griggs  k  Ce.     1879. 


INTKODUCTIOX.  13 


ali)ha}:)et  corresponds,  in  number  and  signification,  with  tlie 
twenty-six  Koman  letters,  and  differs  little,  in  its  unpliilo- 
soj)liieul  principles  and  modes  of  spelling,  from  the  sten- 
ographic systems  of  Willis  (1(312),  Taylor  (1786),  and 
(fould  (1835).  He  gives  as  the  principal  reason  why 
Phonography  can  never  become  general,  the  following 
enunciation  of  its  fundamental  character:  "Its  basis 
is  on  a  rigid  elementary  analysis  of  the  sounds  of  the 
English  language,  re(]uiring  as  many  letters  as  there  are 
sounds."  He  says  further:  ''It  is  certain  that  no  one  can 
ever  acquire  the  same  readiness  in  the  use  of  twenty 
vowel  characters  that  he  can  iu  the  use  of  the  five,  a,  e, 
i,  o,  n."  In  this  objection  he  ignores  the  fact  that  Pho- 
nography employs  but  two  diirerent  forms  for  the  vowels,  the 
dot  and  the  dasii,  which,  when  made  both  heavy  and  light 
double  the  number  to  four  only ;  and  disregards  the  other 
fact,  that  the  skillful  writer  has  no  occasion  to  use  any  vowel 
signs,  or  but  very  few.  Elsewhere  the  author  declaims 
against  omissions  of  the  vowels  in  Phonograjihy,  but  in  the 
develo[>ment  of  his  system  he  provides  a  scale  of  four  im- 
aginary lines,  in  addition  to  the  one  line  of  writing,  by  means 
of  which  to  indicate  the  omission  not  only  of  his  hve  vowels 
but  of  .six  consonants;  while  Phonography  needs  a  scale  of 
only  three  positions:  above  the  line,  on  the  line,  and  under 
the  line. 

As  to  this  author's  objection,  that  "the  alternate  shade  and 
hair  lines  of  the  phonographies  are  a  great  embarassment  to 
rapid  writing,  which  the  reporter  can  surmount  only  by  dis- 
regarding this  feature,"  it  is  best  answered  by  the  fact  that 
he  provides  for  fully  as  much  shading  as  is  employed  in  Pho- 
nography. In  the  first  place,  he  says;  "the  diphthongs  au,  aw, 
OH,  ow,  oi  and  oy  are  represented  by  a,  o  and  i,  shaded  equalhj 
from  top  to  bottom^  In  Phonography  the  ^diphthongs  are  not 
shaded  at  all.  In  the  second  place,  notwithstanding  the 
above  quotation,  he  says:  '■'■No  heavy  lines  are  used,  except 
for  r,  winch,  being  a  heavy  line,  is  added  to  any  other  line  of 
the  alphabet  by  making  it  heavy."  The  result  of  which  is, 
that  as  r  either  precedes  or  follows  almost  every  other  letter 


V. 


14  INTRODUCTION. 


in  the  alphabet,  in  the  formation  of  words,  nearly  every  let- 
ter is  frequently  shaded,  while  in  Phonography  less  than  half 
the  number  are  shaded.  And  if  anything  more  is  needed  to 
save  Phonography  from  this  Knight  of  Absurdity,  the  follow- 
ing will  be  sutficient:  "To  the  unskillful  hand  exact  shad- 
ing may  seem  at  first  to  be  difficult,  but  practice  will  soon  render 
it  ea-vj." 

Phonography  is  a  system  of  shorthand,  based  on  an  an- 
alysis of  words  into  their  elementary  sounds,  and  a  philo- 
sophical representation  of  those  sounds,  without  regard  to 
the  ordinary  mode  of  spelling  them.  The  principal  object 
being  rajndity  of  execution,  with  a  reliable  degree  of  legibil- 
ity, the  simplest  signs  which  it  was  possible  to  obtain  were 
chosen  for  the  alphabet.  They  are,  first,  the  dot,  .  ;  second; 
the  dash,  which  is  only  a  lengthened  dot,  -  ;  third,  the 
straight  line,  —  ;  fourth,  the  curve,  y^~^  .  The  dot  and  dash 
are  used  in  telegraphy,  as  the  swiftest  means  of  recording 
the  words  transmitted  by  lightning.  In  Phonography  they 
are  employed  to  represent  the  vowels,  and  the  straight  lines 
and  curves  to  represent  the  consonants. 

The  following  diagrams  exhibit  the  geometrical  source  from 
which  the  consonants  are  drawn,  and  show  the  ditferent  po- 
sitions they  occupy  in  representing  diflferent  sounds: 


It  will  be  observed  that  the  straight  line  admits  of  four 
different  positions,  and  the  curved  one  eight.  These  are  as 
many  positions  as  can  be  recognized  without  danger  of  con- 
fusion; and  these  two  simi)le  characters,  the  straight  line  and 
curve,  can  be  written  in  these  twelve  jMJsitions  so  as  to  be 
just  as  distinct  and  legible  as  though  this  number  of  differ- 
ently shai>ed  letters  were  employed.  Hero,  then,  are  the 
means  of  representing  twelve   consonant  sounds;  but  since, 


INTRODUCTION.  15 


in  writing,  we  can  make  either  liglit  or  heavy  marks,  this 
number  may  be  doubled  by  recognizing  the  same  number  of 
hmvtj  straight  lines  and  curves. 

While  it  is  found  necessary  to  make  each  of  the  primitive 
characters  heavy,  in  order  to  obtain  a  sufficient  number,  it  is 
also  found  a  useful  and  philosophical  method  of  distinguish- 
ing between  the  natures  of  different  sounds.  Thus,  eight  of 
the  sounds  which  these  characters  are  to  represent  are  mere 
irhispers,  produced  by  the  transition  of  the  organs  of  speech 
from  one  position  to  another,  or  by  the  simple  contact  of  dif- 
ferent parts  of  the  mouth,  without  any  vocal  sound;  and 
there  are  eight  others  made  in  the  .same  manner,  but  they 
have,  in  addition,  as  slightly  roughened  or  vocal  sound,  which 
requires  a  greater  effort  to  produce  them. 

To  follow  nature,  therefore,  and  preserve  a  correspondence 
between  signs  and  sounds,  the  liglit  signs  are  made  to  repre- 
sent the  light  or  whispered  sounds,  and  the  heavy  signs  to 
represent  the  heavy  sounds.  Thus,  both  the  diffirence  be- 
tween the  sounds  and  their  rcsonblance  are  at  once  repre- 
sented. And  it  being  so  natural  to  represent  a  light  sound 
by  a  light  stroke,  and  a  heavy  sound  by  a  heavy  stroke,  the 
phonographic  {jupil  finds,  after  a  little  practice,  that  he 
make's  the  difference  in  the  strokes  without  any  thought 
about  it.  But  the  similarity  of  sound  given  the  heavy 
and  light  strokes  is  so  great  that,  if  at  any  time  the  differ- 
ence in  the  thickness  of  the  lines  is  not  clearly  made,  it  will 
not  seriously  affect  the  legibility  of  the  writing  to  the  expe- 
rienced phonographer.  Thus,  for  example,  if  the  word 
Siimnati  were  written  so  as  to  be  pronounced  Zinzinadi, 
the  reader  could  hardly  mistake  the  intention  of  the  writer. 

The  C0N.SONANTS  are  classified  as  follows: — 

1.  ABRi'Frs. — These  elements  sometimes  called  explo- 
donts,  are  produced  by  a  total  contact  of  the  organs  of 
speech,  abruptly  interrupting  and  exploding  the  outward 
pas.sage  of  the  breath,  or  the  voice.  They  are  eight  in 
number,  and  being  stiff,  unyielding  sounds,  are  appropri- 
ately  represented  by  the    eight    straight,    unyielding    right 


Cc 

16  INTRODUCTION. 


lines,  as    illustrated    in    the   following  table — the  italicised 

letters  of  the  words  indicating  tlie  sounds  represented  : 

Whispered,       \  rq/>e,  j   fa/e,         y  etch,        loc/:, 

Spoken,  \  robe,  I    fa^^fe,        /   f^tye,        —  loy. 

By  a  little  observation  in  comparing  the  sound  of  p  witli 
that  of  b,  in  the  words  rope  and  rube,  the  distinction  of  whix- 
pired  and  xpoken,  or  light  and  heavy,  will  be  appreciated.  As 
far  SIS  articulation,  or  the  contact  of  the  organs  of  sixjcch  is 
concerned,  the  consonants  p  and  b  are  identical ;  the  sound  of 
the  former,  however,  \i  produced  by  the  breath  only,  wliile 
the  latter  requires  the  jisiistance  of  the  voice,  which  com- 
mences before  the  lips,  the  organs  by  wliich  the  articulatic^n 
is  produced,  are  disconnected.  The  same  remarks  apply  to 
each  of  the  other  pairs  of  abrupts,  as  the  reader  will  discover 
by  speaking  the  illustrative  words  in  connection. 

2.  Continuants: — The  organs  of  speech  are  in  contact  in 
the  production  of  these  elements,  yet  not  so  firmly  as  to 
totally  obstruct  the  passage  of  breath,  or  voice ;  but  the 
sounds  may  be  continued  any  length  of  time.  There^  are, 
also,  eight  of  these  elements — half  of  them  whispered  and 
half  spoken;  and  as  they  are  of  a  flowing,  yielding  nature, 
they  are  appropriately  represented  by  curved  and  flowing 
signs;   thus: 


Whispered,    \^  safe, 

(  yvreath. 

)  busa. 

_y  vicious 

Spoken,          V     sat'e, 

(  wreat/ie, 

)  buzz. 

^  vi-sion. 

3.  Liquids. — These  are  r  and  /,  and  are  called  liquids  be- 
cause they  readily  run  into  or  unite  with  other  consonant 
sounds.  They  are  not  distinguished  by  any  variation  of 
sound,  as  the  abrupts  and  continuants,  and  are  represented 
by  light  curves;  thus: 

^  iall,         ~^^  for. 


INTRODUCTION.  17 


4.  Nasals. — The  sounds  of  m,  n  and  ng,  are  called  nasals 
from  tlic  fact  that  the  organs  are  brought  into  complete  con- 
tact, and  the  voice  driven  through  the  nose.  The  m  and  n 
are  represented  by  the  two  remaining  light  curves,  and  nf/  by 
the  heavy  curve  corresponding  to  n,  as  being  nearly  related 
to  that  sound;   thus: 

.^-^  seem,         ^--^  seew,         — "  sing. 

5.  CoALESCENTS. —  Y  and  w  hold  a  medial  character  be- 
tween the  vowels  and  consonants ;  lo  being  a  weak  sound  or 
modification  of  oo,  and  y  a  modification  of  short  i,  or  ee. 
They  never  occur  in  English  except  before  a  vowel,  with 
which  they  closely  coalesce.  The  following  are  their  pho- 
nographic signs,  and  the  words  illustrating  their  powers: 

^  «'ay,        ^  yea. 

G.  Aspirate: — The  power  of  h  is  simply  a  breathing  upon 
the  following  vowel,  and  is  generally  represented  by  a  light 
tick,  thus :  ^ ;  but  sometimes  a  lengthened  form  /  is  em- 
ployed. 

Vowel  Arrangement. — In  order  to  represent  twelve 
vowel  sounds  by  the  two  signs,  a  dot  and  a  dash,  a  scheme 
similar  to  that  of  representing  musical  sounds  by  the  round 
note  is  resorted  to.  As  the  vowels  rarely  occur  except  in 
connection  with  a  consonant,  they  are  indicated  by  tlie  posi- 
tion in  which  the  dot  or  dash  is  placed  to  the  consonant 
stroke ;  thus,  a  dot  placed  at  the  beginning  of  a  consonant 
represents  the  vowel  ah,  at  the  middle  a,  at  the  end  e;  the 
dash  at  the  beginning  is  au,  at  the  middle  6,  at  the  end  6o. 
The  remaining  six  vowels  are  short  or  brief,  as  compared  with 
the  foregoing  six,  and  are  appropriat<ily  represented  by  the 
dot  and  dash  in  the  same  manner  but  made  Ughter;  and  most 
of  what  has  been  said  in  regard  to  liglitand  heavy  consonants 
applies  to  the  vowels. 

In  tlie  following  illustration  the  vowel  signs  are  placed  to 
a  dotted  line,  that   represents  the  length  of  any   consonant 


18 


INTRODUCTION. 


stroke,  merely  to  indicate  the  position  of  the  dot  and  dash ; 
it  is  no  part  of  the  vowel.  The  italic  letters  in  the  accom- 
panying words  suggest  the  vowel  sounds: 


•!  ale, 


eel. 


i  rtH,       — i  oak, 


I  am, 


■\e\\, 


ill, 


on, 


i  "P. 


wood, 


Diphthongs: — These  being  compound  sounds,  and  all  the 
simple  characters  being  otherwise  appropriated,  they  are  reji- 
resented  by  complex  signs.  They  will  be  understood  by  the 
following  illustration : 


tsle, 


i  oii, 


Jowl, 


I        '  i  — '  /li 

ORGANIC  CLASSIFICATION  OF  CONSONANTS. 
The  following  cla.ssification,  with  reference  to  the  po.sitions 
of  the  mouth  and  the  parts  empK)yed  in  jtroducing  the  sev- 
eral  elementary  .-sounds,  will    interest    the    reader  having  a 
scientific  turn  of  mind : 


Abnipt-s 


Coiitin- 
iiaiUs. 


^  Wlu'speted. 

i  Sp()fien. 

C  Whi^ered. 

i  Spoken. 


Liquiils. 

liesotiaiits, 

Ambigues. 


\b 


' — ^m 
^w 


(tb) 
^tk ) 


/ch 

/j 

^'sh 
Vzh 

V 'U 


— 'fe' 


In  the  above  division  of  the  (or.Kfir.ant  sounds,  reading  in 
columns  downwards,  we  begin  with,  (1),  tho.se  formed  at  the 
lips,  -dap,  b,/,  &c.,  and   call    them    I^tbials;  (2),    we  then  go 


V 


INTRODUCTION.  19 


back  to  t'.ie  region  of  the  tip  of  the  tongue  and  tlie  teeth, 
where,  t,  d,  &e.,  are  formed,  which  class  we  term  Linyuo-Den- 
tal%  (tongue-teeth  sounds;)  (3),  then  to  the  hard  palate  or 
roof  of  the  mouth,  a  little  back  of  the  teeth,  where  we  find 
ch,j,  s/i,  &c.,  which  we  call  Linguo-Palakdx;  and,  finally,  to 
the  foot  of  the  tongue,  near  the  throat,  where  k,  y,  &c.,  are 
formed,  which  we  term  Gutturals,  or  Throat-Sounds. 


iliott  of:  litims. 


I'lioiietioH,  from  phmiv,  voice,  i;*  a  general  term,  .signif3Mn<;  the 
science  of  the  voiue.  Pbonetic  science  treats  of  the  different 
sounds  of  the  human  voice,  their  modifications  and  combinations; 
hence  the  mode  of  spelling  based  on  this  science  is  called  phonetic 
spelling,  to  distinguish  it  from  the  ordinary  spelling  now  in  use. 

I'liunography,  from  phone,  voice,  and  ijruphc,  writing,  means 
voice-writing,  or  the  representation  of  the  sounds  of  the  human  voice 
by  written  signs  ;  it  is  also  applied  to  the  style  of  writing  thus  pro- 
duced by  means  of  Mr.  Isaac  Pitman's  brief  and  scientific  shorthand 
alphabet. 

Plumotypy,  from  phone,  voice,  and  tiipos,  type,  means  the  art  of 
representing  the  sounds  of  the  human  voice  by  printed  letters,  in 
accordance  with  the  rules  of  phonetic  science;  also  the  style  of  print- 
ing thus  produced.  / 

I'honotype  is  a  printed  letter,  used  to  represent  any  particular 
sound  in  a  word. 

I'honograin,  from  jihoiic,  voice,  and  ijrumma,  letter,  signifies  a 
written  sign  or  letter,  used  for  the  representation  of  a  certain  sound. 

Logogram,  from  Ioijoh,  word,  and  r/rawma,  letter,  is  a  phonogram 
or  single  sign,  used  for  the  sake  of  brevity  to  represent  the  whole 
word:  us  |  (/,  which  represents  do. 

Ciraiiiinalogiic,  (the  parts  of  the  last  word  transposed,)  mcan.s  a 
letter- word,  or  a  word  that  is  represented  by  a  logogram;  as  do  is  the 
gramm;ili)guc  represented  by  the  logogram  |  d. 

I'hraiseograin  is  a  combination  of  shorthand  signs,  for  the  rep- 
resentation (if  a  phrase,  or  several  words  in  a  sentence. 

Pliraseography  is  the  system  of  representing  phrases  by  the 
writing  of  phraseograms. 


yipm^rmljit  Ji\[i\}n\iti, 


a 
o 


Consonants. 

\  p   rope 

V_  f  sa/e 

Q 

\  b   Tohe 
t   fate 
1    d    f:u/e 

y  Q    et-:h 

H 
Z 

;< 

V  V   sai;e 

V  t   wrea^A 
(^    d   wrea/Ae 

j    s   buss 

2l 

<  - 

/    j    edge 

O 

)    z   bus3 

t3 

k    lotA; 

_y  J   vicious 

S    % 

^^  3   vision 

<1 

o 

O    ^ 


j    a  arm 

'l    a  ale 

e  eel 

I  G  aM;ed 

••  o  ope 

_;  Mi.  fool 


r 


Vowels. 


i     e  ell 

.1     i  ill 

0  odd 

~i     u  wp 

J    u  full 


a 
c 

&4 


1  Ml 

r  for 

m  seem 

n  seen 

B  si?i^ 

y  yaa 

h  ^ind 

i)  izle 

a  oil 


i\\       TS      OW\ 


H    dwpe 


Kote. — The  vowels  are  simply   the  dots,  (lashes,  etc.,    placed  to  the 
Vicginning,  middle,  or  end,  of  the  consonant  signs. 


V 


AMERICAN 

^A|^UAL  Of  pHOJ^OQI^APHY, 


'B[jr$t  ^0$$0tn 


EXPLODENT  C0^'80NANTS. 

1.  Let  the  pupil  take  a  pointer,  or  a  ^n  without  ink,  and 
trace  the  signs  in  the  following  division  of  the  consonants, 
termed  ejplodaifs, — the  perpendicular  and  inclined  ones  from 
the  top  downwards,  and  the  horizontal  ones  from  left  to  right, 
— sj)eaking,  at  the  sfime  time,  the  name  of  each,  as  printed 
beneath. 

\      I       I      /      /     -     _ 

I'e  Be  T(>  I)c  Chay         Jay  Kay  Gay 

Tlie  consecutive  order  and  tabular  arrangement  of  these 
signs  should  Ix;  fixed  in  the  mind,  by  ro])eating  them  fre- 
(|uently  as  above;  after  which  the  exercise  may  be  varied 
as  follows: 

iMi      \\    VN^V\    \\    \\   \\  \\ 

T,D    -1-|        I     I        I    I        I     I        I  J       I     I       I     I- 

ch,j    /v  /-7^-yy  //  7/  //  //- 

K,  (} —  -^ 

2.  In  the  above,  and  a  few  subsequent  exercises,  is  exhib- 
ited the  manner  of  writing  on  double-ruled  pajjcr  ;  in  the  use 


22  AMERICAN    MANUAL 


of  a  single  line  the  signs  should  be  written  to  it  as  though  it 
were  the  lower  line  in  the  double-ruling,  thus: 

\\\\l     I     I     I//// 

_ . ^ — _ — J- 

3.  The  power,  or  simple  sound,  of  each  sign,  must  now  Ix; 
learned,  and  this  may  be  most  readily  done  as  follows: 
Beneath  each  sign  will  be  placed  a  key-^ord,  with  a  hyphen 
just  before  the  letter,  or  letters,  representing  the  last  sound 
in  the  word;  and  if  the  learner  will  pronounce  each  word  as 
far  as  the  hyphen,  then  pause,  and  in  a  moment  give  the  final 
st)und  by  itself,  that  sound  will  be  the  unvarying  power  of  the 
shorthand  sign  above  the  word.     Thus: 

\-      \        !        I        /       /       _      - 

TO-pe         ro-fee,        fa-fe      fa-rfe,        ea-cA         a-^e,  \o-ck  lo-;/ 

Of  course  the  final  e  in  ropf,  robe  fat*-,  fade,  and  in  ag*',  is 
silent;  the  ch  in  eaf/i,  and  the  ck  in  lock,  represent  single 
s(mnds;  and  the  g  in  age  has  the  same  sound  as_;  in^oy. 

The  drill  on  the  key-words  should  be  repeated  until  the 
pure  sound  of  each  sign  can  be  given  by  itself,  without  hesita- 
tion ;  and,  in  sjx?lling  out  words  in  reading  exercises,  the  sounds 
of  the  signs  sliould  generally  be  employed,  in  jireference  to 
their  names. 

COifBIXING   THE  COXSONANTS. 

4.  When  a  word  requires  two  or  more  consonant  signs,  thoy 
.should  all  be  written  without  lifting  the  jx;n,  continuing  from 
one  stroke  into  another,  until  all  are  formed,  thus: 


t 


=^=^=^ 


The  first  downward  stroke  sh<mld  stop  on  the  lM)ttom  line, 
and  when  another  one  occurs  in  tlie  sjime  word  it  siioukl  be 
continucfl  on  l)elow,  as  the  tail  of  a  letter  in  longhand 
writing. 


OF  PHONOGRAPHY.  23 


The  following,  and  all  other  reading  exercises,  after  being 
read  once  or  twice  by  sound,  should  also  be  copied  into  the 
learner's  copy-book,  the  pupil  speaking  the  sounds  of  the  signs 
as  he  copies  them.  In  doing  this  either  the  powers  of  the  let 
ters  may  be  used  a.s,  j)  ^'j  k  2>,  t  k,  &c.,  or  the  names,  pe  ka, 
kape,  t&  ka,  &c.;  in  class  teaching  the  latter  method  is  the 
better,  after  having  drilled  the  learners  well  in  speaking  the 
simple  powei-s  of  the  letters. 

5,  In  copying  this  exercise,  observe  that  the  place  of  begin- 
ning each  form,  or  outline,  of  a  word  containing  a  perj^en- 
dicular  or  inclined  stroke,  is  just  above  the  top  ruled  line. 
If  paper  containing  single  ruling  is  used,  begin  writing  these 
strokes  their  length  above  the  line. 

Reading  and  Writing  Exercise  I. 

\=r—x— 1:^—1 zL     -7     /     / 


In  writing  the  following  exercise,  from  print,  frequent  ref- 
erence to  §  1  and  §  4  will  be  necessary  for  a  time,  in  order 
to  insure  correctness.  If  doubt  .should  arise  as  to  the  proper 
shorthand  sign  to  be  used  for  any  letter,  it  may  be  settled  at 
once  by  consulting  g  3. 

It  is  a  good  plan,  after  liaving  written  any  combination  of 
strokes  correctly,  to  rejH\it  it  several  times  before  going  on  te 
the  next  one, 

Wl!ITIN(;    EXER<'ISK. 


■  pk 

l)k 

tk 

(Ik 

ch-k 

jk 

kg 

g-ch 

kp 

kl. 

kt 

kd 

k-ch 

kj 

kk 

gk 

pb 

td 

ch-p 

tb 

bt 

jHch 

d-ch 

jb 

24  AMERICAN"    MANUAL 


LONG  VOWELS. 

G,  The  six  primary  or  long  vowels  of  the  English  language, 
for  practical  purposes,  are  thus  arranged,  in  conformity  some- 
what with  the  scientific  chissification  of  the  elementary  sounds 
of  the  language.  The  sounds  are  indicated  hy  the  following 
letters  and  the  words  beneath : 


All 

A      • 

E 

AW 

0 

00 

arm 

ale 

eel 

awl 

old 

ooze 

The  first  three  sounds  are  represented  by  a  licavy  dot,  placed 
at  the  beginning,  middle,  or  end,  of  a  consonant;  and  the  last 
three  by  a  .short,  heavy  da.sh  in  the  same  positinn.     Tlius: 

AH  A  E  AW  0  00 

o-rm  fl-le  ee-\  mv-\  o-ld  oo-zv 

The  shorthand  sign  j  in  connection  with  the  dot^;  and  da.sli- 
es  above,  is  used  merely  to  indicate  their  position  to  any  con- 
sonant. 

7.  The  sounds  of  these  dots  and  dashes  may  be  learned  by 
first  pronouncing  the  key-words  underneath,  noticing  the  fir.st 
or  vowel  sound  in  each;  then,  by  pronouncing  each  word  as  far 
as  the  hyphen  only,  the  proijer  sound  of  the  shorthand  vowel 
sign  will  be  heard. 

8.  This  vowel  scale  should  be  repeated  over  and  over,  thus: 
"AH,  A,  E,  heavy  dots;  AW,  o,  DO,  heavy  dashes,"  until  they 
can  be  as  readily  recalled  as  the  figures  1,  2,  3,  etc.  They  may 
be  descriljed  as  follows:  ah  is  the  first-place  heavy  dot;  a  is 
the  second-place  heavy  dot:  E  is  the  third-place  heavy  dot;  aw 
is  the  firstrplace  heavy  dash;  o  is  the  second-place  heavy 
dash ;  oo  is  the  third-place  heavy  dash. 


OF  PHONOGRAPHY.  25 


VOWEL  PLACES. 


9.  To  aid  the  learner  in  understanding  the  three  positions 
in  which  the  vowel  signs  are  written  to  the  several  consonant 
strokes,  and  to  remember  their  order,  the  following  illu.stra- 
tions  are  presented : 

Before   Connonauts. 

x  X  \  1   -^1   J    y  y  y  L^  j^  -JL 

After   Conionaiits. 

\  X  \.  r  1'^  Is  /'  A  4  —  ~  — 

VOCALIZIXG   SIXOLE   COXSOXAXTS. 

10.  In  vocalizing  the  consonants,  that  is,  in  placing  the 
vowels  to  them,  the  dots  and  dashes  should  be  written  near 
the  strokes,  but  not  so  that  they  will  join;  thus,  |^  tea,  ^  age. 

X  P(^-     The   dashes   should   l)e  written    at   riglit   angles,  or 
nearly  so,  with  the  consonants,  as,  \  ^wi/',  "j~  (ji>,  /^jaiv. 

Inclined  signs  are  regarded  as  perpendicular,  wath  reference 
to  the  reading  or  placing  of  vowels  before  or  after  them. 

11.  If  the  vowel  is  to  be  read  first,  we  place  it  before  or  to 
the  left  of  vertical  and  inclined  consonants,  and  above  horizon- 
tal ones;  thus:  |  eat,  X  ape,  _'_  oak,'  if  the  vowel  is  to  be  read 
after  the  consonant,  we  place  it  after,  or  to  the  right  of  ver- 
tical and  inclined  consonants,  and  below  horizontal  ones;  thus: 
\- lUnj,  —r    (IdiJ,    X    'Toe,       .    ley. 

12.  The  following  exercise  should  be  read  over  frequently, 
till  the  learner  acquires  tlie  correct  sounds  of  the  vowels,  and 
their  consecutive  order. 


26  AMERICAN    MANUAL 


Reading  axd  Copying  Exercise  II. 

Words  in  which  the    Votceh  follotc  (he  Consonants. 


\ 

\ 

\. 

\ 

^ 

V 

pa 

pay 

pea 

paw 

bow 

pooh 

\ 

1- 

\. 

r 

1- 

hah 

day 

bee 

taw 

toe 

two 

/ 

/ 

/^ 

A 

L 

jay 

gee 

jaw 

joe 

do 

• 

1 

— j- 

1 

gay 

key 

caw 

go 

coo 

1 

^owels  i^recedimj 

Consonants. 

i 

y 

/ 

— « 

• 

ate 

each 

age 

eke 

ache 

-|      ,-l        -|         -I        X    -L- 

ought  oat  awed  owed  ope  oak 

VOCALIZING   COMBINED  CONSONANTS. 

13.  The  spelling,  aiul  manner  of  writing,  the  following  words 
may  be  studied  first  with  the  aid  of  the  key  underneath  ;  after 
which  it  is  a  good  plan  to  lay  a  strip  of  paper  over  the  key 
and  read  without  the  aid  of  the  printed  w'ords;  then  revei-se 
the  process;  lay  the  paper  over  the  shorthand  line,  and  write 
in  phonography  from  the  printed  copy,  and  afterward  compare 
your  own  with  the  forms  here  given. 


_ 

OF   PHONOGRAPHY.  27 


Readixg  and  Copying  Exercise  III. 
peak         keep  take         gate  talk         coai        coop 

z.    -y     n    z^     A     Ti   -.— 

cheek    cage    caught  chalk    joke     goat   cake 

^  ^   r  r   ^  \  ^ 

beat  paid         date         taught        boat        pope        boot. 

Writing  Exercise. 

'  Pa,  pay,  day,  gay,  bay;  tea,  hoe,  key;  aid,  ache,  age,  eat; 
each;  paw,  bow,  booh,  taw,  toe,  two,  dough,  do,  chaw,  joe, 
caw,  go,  coo. 

Note.— The  author  has  prepared  a  series  of  "Writing  Exercises, 
for  the  use  of  Studeuts  in  Phonograi)hy,"  in  wliich  the  illustrative 
words  in  each  writing  lesson  of  the  Manual  are  arranged  on  the  mar- 
gin of  copy-book  pages,  with  a  blank  line  following  each  word,  in 
wliich  it  may  be  written  a  dozen  times  or  more.  Eacli  exercise  on 
words  IS  followed  witli  short  sentences,  both  in  short-liaiid  and  com- 
mon print,  to  be  read  and  then  written  several  times  in  blank  lines 
underneath.  It  is  thought  that  such  an  arrangementof  exercises  will 
so  facilitate  the  writing  of  them  as  to  greatly  promote  the  rapid  pro- 
gress of  pupils. 

KEVFKVV  OF  Till-:   FIRST  LESSON. 

(See  ^1.1  What  are  the  names  of  the  straight  consonant  signs? 
What  are  they  termed?  {■i:'^)  Repeat  the  powers  of  these  signs. 
{ jJ  4.  I  When  two  or  more  consonants  are  re(|uiretljjD  a  word,  how  are 
they  written?  (^o. )  Wiiere  do  you  begin  to  write  perpendicular  or 
inclined  strokes?  (?  C)  How  many  simple  long  vowels  are  there  in  the 
Fnglish  language?  Repeat  them,  (i;  8  i  How  are  the  first  three  rejjre- 
sented?  The  last  three?  I  i;  10.  )  How  are  the  dash  vowels  written 
with  reference  to  the  consonants?  (  ^  II.  )  How  are  the  vowels  written 
to  the  consonants  with  reference  to  reading  the  same? 


28  AMERICAN    MANUAL 


\nnnh  J[i$$mt> 


CONTINUANT   CONSONANTS. 

14.  The  second  division  of  consonant  signs  is  given  below, 
preceded  by  tlieir  names,  and  followed  by  a  line  of  key-words 
Ijeneath,  indicating  tlieir  several  sounds: 

eF         Ve        ITH        THe        eS        Ze        iSH        ZHa 

^        ^  (  {  )  )  J  J 

sa-/e      sa-re      oa,-th  \oa,-the      bu-««       bu-zz        ru-»/i       a-siire 

Tlie  learner  must  pursue  the  same  course,  in  order  to  obtain 
the  simple  sounds  of  these  signs,. as  he  did  with  the  explodents 
in  'i  2. 

15.  When  the  sounds  of  these  signs  are  comprehended,  and 
they  can  be  readily  made,  their  consecutive  order  should  be 
well  memorized,  and  the  position  of  each  sign  well  fixed  in  the 
mind,  so  that  they  will  not  be  confounded  with  the  additional 
curved  signs  which  are  yet  to  be  learned  ;  after  wliicii  tlii^ 
following  exercise  may  be  traced,  and  then  copied  from 
memory,  repeating  the  sound  of  each  sign  while  doing  so. 
They  are  all  written  from  top  downward,  except  that,  in  com- 
bination with  other  signs,  _y  is  occasionally  writteii  upward. 

F>V:      V^V.      V^.^      V.^      V:.^      V.V      ^^      ^V 


Th,TH:   f    ( 

(    ( 

(  ,( 

(( 

(( 

(  ( 

( 

S     Z:        ^    ) 

)) 

)) 

)) 

.)) 

)) 

,0 

Sh,Zh:    J  J 

JJ 

yj 

JJ 

JJ 

yj 

.  u 

V 

OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


29 


Beading  and  Copying  Exercise  IV, 


"I       "T 


"37       ^         ^       ^ 


s 

\ 

^ 

"l 

y 

V 

\ 

\ 

\ 

V 

\ 

\ 

\ 

\ 

> 

\ 

I 

^ 

} 

} 

r" 

< 

< 

J 

I 

I 

I 

I 

\ 

\ 

s 

\ 

{ 

< 

< 

< 

> 

> 

/ 

/ 

\ 

\ 

V 

V 

b 

K_J 

\ 

3 

i 

i 

/ 

/ 

\ 

] 

I 

I 

Writing 

Exercise. 

fg 

vg 

kf 

kv 

gf 

gv 

k-th 

k-dh 

g-tll 

g-dh 

sk 

zg 

k-sh 

g-sh 

sh-k 

sh-g 

fp 

fb 

ft 

fd 

f-ch 

fj 

tli-t 

th-d 

pf 

bf 

si) 

pv 

St 

bv 
sd 

p-th 

b-tl. 

p-dh 
sli-t 

b-dh 

sh-p 

sh-b 

sh-d 

t-th 

t-dh 

d-th 

d-dh 

ts 

tz 

ds 

dz 

ch-s 

cli-z 

js 

y- 

jvsh 

b-sh 

ch-sh 

j-sli 

f-th 

f-dll 

ff 

fv 

f-sh 

f-sha 

v-th 

v-sh 

sh-f 

sli-v 

sh-s 

sh-z 

ss 

sz 

s£ 

8V 

30 


^JIERICAX    MANTAL 


16.  These  curved  signs  are  combined  with  each  other,  and 
with  the  straight  strokes,  in  the  same  manner  as  the  straiglit 
strokes  are  united  one  with  another  in  g  4,  page  22.  The  dash 
vowel  signs  are  also  placed  to  them  in  alx)ut  the  same  way,  viz: 
at  right  angles  to  the  curve. 


Reading  and  Copying  Exercise  V. 


>    r    J 


say 


she 


-)     -( 


J' 

shaw 

ooze         ask 


^.    ^    r     ). 

fee        foe        thaw      see 

J^    -I      •)     ^ 

show    shoe       eaae        eve       owes      oath 

\i    ^   ^    ^   <     ^     r^ 

feed        fade         faith         food       sheep       shape       shade 

shake      path    bathe   shave     sheaf        thief       veto       evoke 

LIQUIDS,  NASALS,  AMBIGUES,  AND  ASPIRATE. 

17.  The  remainder  of  the  consonants  can  not  be  grouped  as 
those  heretofore  given;  nor  do  they  exist  in  pairs  of  whispered 
and  vocal;  therefore  they  must  be  learned  as  indei>endeiit 
signs.  The  pure  sounds  of  these  signs  should  be  learned  as  the 
others  have  been,  and  a.s  indicated  below : 


Liquids. 


Nasals. 


eL       aR 


Rav 


eM       eN       iNG 


fa//         far  row 


ow  seem       seen  sin;/ 

Ambigues.     I    ^        ^        Aspirate.     ]    / 

(     iray         lea  <•  -^ay 


OF   PHONOGRAPHY.  31 


18.  L  f^  h  written  upward,  when  the  only  stroke  conso- 
nant in  a  word,  and  generally  so  in  combination  with  others; 
but  it  is  written  flownward,  in  combination,  when  it  is  more 
tionvenient  to  do  «>. 

19.  ^  ^  is  written  downward,  and  Bai/  ^ ,  as  an  alter- 
nate, is  written  upward.  It  is  distinguished  from  Chni/  j  , 
first,  in  the  fact  that  Ray  is  more  inclined  than  Chay,  and 
second,  because  the  former  is  always  written  upward  and  the 
latter  always  downward,  and  the  direction  in  which  they  are 
written  is  in  most  cases  apparefil. 

20.  M  .-^,  n  v_^,    ng  .^^,  are  written  from  left  to  right. 

21.  ]Vai/  "^  and  Yea  f^  are  written  downward,  as  are 
all  heavy  perpendicular  and  inclined  strokes. 

22.  Hay  /  is  always  written  upward;  but  a  down-stroke 
form  for  h,   /  ,  is  sometimes  employed. 

2;!.  Now  trace  the  following  lines  with  a  pointer,  re[>eating 
the  sound  of  each  sign  in  doing  so;  afterwards  copy  them  with 
|>enci'  or  i)eu: 

\.rrrrrrrr 


>?.  ^ 

"-' 

^^ 

^^ 

"-^ 

■>-^ 

^^ 

^-^ 

w  ^ 

>^" 

^ 

^ 

^ 

^ 

^ 

^ 

Y  r 

r 

r 

r 

r 

r 

r 

r 

H     / 

/ 

/ 

/ 

/ 

/ 

/ 

/ 

32 


AMEIilCAN    MAM'AI, 


Reading  and  Copying  Exercise  VI. 


Note. — Aft<«r  reading  and  copying  thi*  Exercise,  as  directed  on  page  29,  ci-e 
Ikiw  many  words  caa  be  made  out  of  tlie  various  combiuatiou«  by  iub«riiiig 
appro()riate  vowels. 

r\\r    n  \r     n  \r   r— _r  ,^^  _yn 

v-.v-.-Aun  u-n    A  n    n 
.^  r^  r^  Y  r-  c  ^^r   -y 

^  v/    1^.  ^)    ^    ^J  r-\  '--V- 
^„^l-^  'A-'  .-^    <^     ^L    i-^^  *^    / 


S'-^ 


OF  rUONOORAl'HY. 


33  ^ 


24.  To  distinguish  between  the  upward  and  downward  f~ , 
when  speaking  of  them,  tlie  up-stroke  is  called  Iauj,  and  the 
down-stroke,  EL 

25.  In  the  following  exercise  observe  that  the  first-place 
vowels  ah  and  au\  are  written  \.o  I  (  r  /  and  h  /  ^^  the 
plate  where  you  begin  to  write  them,  viz:  on  the  line;  the  rule 
being,  that  the  first-place  ix)sition  of  a  consonant  is  at  the  end 
where  you  begin  to  form  it,  and  the  third-place  where  you 
finish  it. 

First  read,  and  then  write,  as  described  in  g  6. 

Heading  and  CoPYiifG  Exercise  VII. 


c.ilra         maim 


woe 


fame 


woke  wake 


r 

yea 


f     r-  c  (^     r\  r\ 

lay            lea  law  low            leap  leaf  league 

•^^    ^  ^  '^  ^^^^  ^  ^ 

ark        air  ear  oar  arm  meal  male 


meek 


ream  roam         room      knave        kneel  nail         cool 


V     X/-      V     XT       • 

peel        pale  ball  pole  gore  lame        loam 


hay  hail 


r 

£4  AMKRICAX    MANTAL 


Writixg  Exercise  II. 

REMARKS.  — The  words  in  this  Exerrise  containing  tlic  letter  r  phonlij 
all  be  written  with  the  flown-stroke  sign  for  this  sound,  except  those  in  tlie 
la»t  paragrdpli,  which  must  be  written  with  the  np-stroke.  Rules  for  writing  ; 
and  r,  upward  and  downward,  are  given  on  Page  42. 

Ark,  lark,   par,   bar,  tar,  mar,  jar,  far,  farm,  laugh. 

Pale,  bail,  tale,  tame,  dame,  lake,  lave,  lathe,  faith,  vague, 
shame,  game,  delay,  became,  female. 

Peel,  beam,  team,  deem,  deal,  tear,  teeth,  jeer,  theme,  keel, 
gear,  veal,  fear,  shear,  veer,  leer, -leak,  heap,  heed,  heath,  heed, 

Paul,  bawlj  tall,  daub,   gall,  fall,  laud,   maul,   haw,    hawl. 

[  Write  t/ie  foUowing  words  with  upstrokes  _J  and  (^  ] 
shale,    shoal. 

Pore,  bore,  both,  tore,  door,  toll,  dome,  chore,  comb,  foam, 
showed,    lobe,  load,  loaf,  lore. 

Pool,  boom,  tool,  tomb,  tooth,  tour,  doom,  booth,  loop, 
loom,  room. 

Wrath,  raid,  rake,  rage,  rave,  reap,  read,  reach,  wreathe. 
Wrought,  wrote,  road,  robe,  rope,  root,  rude,  repay,  retail, 
redeem,  revoke,  parch,  porch,  torch,  forge,  hearth. 

REVIEW  OF  THE  SECOND  LESSON. 
(See  §14.)  "What  are  the  names  of  the  first  eight  curved  consonants? 
What  are  they  termed  ?  Repeat  their  powers.  (^15.)  In  what  direc- 
tion are  they  written?  (i;16.)  How  are  the  da.«h  vowels  written  to  the 
curved  consonants  ?  (§17.)  What  are  the  names  of  the  liquid  conson- 
ants? Of  the  nasals?  (^  18,  19.)  How  are  these  liquids  written?  Give 
their  sounds.  (§20.)  How  are  the  nasals  written  ?  Give  their  sounds. 
(§  17.  )  Whatare  the  names  and  sounds  of  the  ambigucs  ?  What  of  the 
aspirate?  f  §  21,  22.)  How  are  thei^e  signs  written?  (  i>  111. )  How  are  o/tay 
and  ratf  distinguished?  (§25.)  Where  is  the  first-place  vowel  written 
to  laijy  ray  and  haifl    Where  the  third-place? 


r    / 

OF   PHONOGRAPHY.  35 

/- - ■ 


\x\  ^t$$mt> 


SHORT    VOWELS. 

26.  The  student  having  lieeonie  familiar  with  the  arrange- 
ment and  manner  of  writing  the  long  vowels,  it  will  now  be 
an  easy  matter  for  him  to  understand  and  use  the  following 
scale  of  short  vowels : 

■j  a         •!  6         \\        ""16        -I  u         _|  66 

Ah  in         at  ell  it  odd  up  foot 

The  six  vowel  signs  above  given  approximate  so  nearly  in 
quality  to  those  given  in  §  4,  the  main  difference  being  length 
or  fullness,  that  they  are  represented  in  precisely  the  same 
manner,  excepting  that  the  signs  are  made  lighter.* 


*  In  England,  where  Phonography  had  its  origin,  the  six  long  and 
.■■ix  short  vowel.*  thus  presented,  are  all  the  simple  vocal  elements 
recognized  in  good  pronunciation.  In  this  country,  however,  our 
standard  dictionaries,  Webster  and  Worcester,  recognize  and  mark 
three  additional  vowel  sounds;  as  heard  in  the  words:  (1)  nsk,  Inst^ 
{  2  I  (lir.  their:  (  .*? )  hrr,  Dir.  The  first  being  a  medial  sound,  between 
the  vowels  \niirm  and  nt.  may  be  appropriately  represented  by  length- 
ening the  first-place  light  dot  into  a  light  parallel  dash:  thus: 
)  _  (ink,  Vr^  amma.  The  second  being  regarded  by  most 
authors  as  a  modification  of  long  a,  (Webster  having  marked  it  so 
until  quite  recently  \  may  be  represented  by  lengthening  the  middle- 
place  heavy  dot  into  a  parallel  dash  :  thns  :    ^^^_^    pair,       (•  dorf. 

The  third  being  regarded  by  refined  si)cak(>rs  as  a  slight  lengthening  of 
the  short  vowel  in  vnt.  and  by  others  as  the  vowel  in  up,  modified  by 
the  following  r,  it  may  be  appropriately  represented  by  the  middle-place 
light  dash,  written  j)arallel   to  the  stem:   thus:     '^^^      'rr,  '\ fir. 

In   ordinary   writing,  however,  it  is  not  necessary  to  make  these  nice 


c ^ 

'     36  AMERICAN   MANUAL 

27.  The  proper  sounds  of  these  dots  and  dashes,  in  their  several 
positions,  must  be  well  memorized.  They  may  be  learned  in 
the  sjime  manner  as  the  long  vowels  were  learned,  by  first 
pronouncing  the  key-words  underneath,  and  then  beginning 
to  pronounce  them  but  omitting  to  sound  the  consonants. 
They  are  designated  thus :  a  is  the  first-place  light  dot;  ^  is 
the  second-place  lighf  dot;  \  is  the  third-place  light  dot;  <5  is 
the  first-place  light  dash;  ft  is  the  second-place  light  da.sh ;  (i^J 
is  the  third-place  light  dash. 

As  a  general  thing  it  is  more  convenient,  and  excejjt  in 
analyzing  words  it  is  just  as  well,  to  name  the  short  vowels 
with  the  consonant  t  after  them;  thus:  at,  et,  it,  ot,  ut,  oot. 


COMPLETE   VOWEL   SCALE. 

28.  Another  method  of  drill,  in  attaining  the  correct  sounds 
of  the  short  vowels,  is  to  utter  them  in  connection  with  the 

long   vowels,   as  in   the   following   table,   thus;  <'ah a," 

'<aye---6,"  "e---3(,"  "aw- --6,"  "oh---fi,"  «6o---60." 
Rejx'at  the  scale  in  this  manner,  over  and  over  again : 


1  st  place, 

*|  ah  -     -    - 

-      'l^ 

1  ''^^'   -    - 

■       1^ 

2d  place. 

•   a          -     - 

-      -16 

-j  oh    -    - 

-    -jfl 

Hd  place^ 

Je     -.    -    - 

-      i  i 

«i  ^^^  '    ' 

-     J  66 

29.  The  following  exercise  on  the  short  vowels  should  Ik? 
practiced  till  their  consecutive  order  is  well  mastered,  and  the 
position  of  each  sound  can  be  told  without  hesitation. 

distinctions;  bence,  wo  represent  these  vowels  by  the  dots  and  dashes 
jiresented  above.  Those  who  wish  to  rejiresent  these  shade  vowels  can 
do  so  as  here  indicated. 


OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


Eeading  and  Copying  Exercise  VIII. 


oot, 

\ 

M,l., 


nig,       lap,  hat. 


at,  et,  it,  ot,  ut, 

\         \         X         \         X 

ab,  cb,  ib,  ob,  ub, 

pack,     tack,       jack,         fag,  lag, 

peck,     deck,     check,  leg,         neck,       nell,      bell,         hedge, 

pick,     tick,      chick,  fig,         lick,        nib,        big,  rig, 

dock,        cob,        lock,         poll,       knock,      rock,         fog,       hobby, 

Ll   -^!^  r  v,^  A^,  ^  ,4 

duck,        cub,      luck,       dull,       numb,       ruin,      buggy,    ruddy, 

Ll  Vj.  r^  v""  v.,^  i_,  r"  \^ 

took,       book,      look,         bull,       nook,     shook,        rook,    pully, 
air,      fare,        lath,        laugh,       rare,        early,      earthly,       firm. 

Writing  Exercise  IIT. 
Add,  am,  back,  lack,  rack,  rap,  catch,  hatch,  hang. 
Ebb,  edge,  egg,  bell,  fell,  dell,  red,  ready,  head. 
Pig,  tip,  pill,  pick,  dip,  mill,  gill,  hill. 
Odd,  off,  top.  shock,  lock,  mock,  folly,  body. 
Uj),  us,  cup,  luck,  love,  jug,  mug,  rug,  putty,  lucky. 
Pull,  took,  look,  cook,  pully,  luUy. 
Asp,  data,  dicta;  bear,  share,  repair;  earth,  early,  mercy. 


452^i.33 


38 

AMERICAN   MANUAL 

1.1 
As  in  ice, 

DIPHTHONGS. 

'^     01                   f,\    GW 
oil,                      owl. 

nude. 

80.  The  sounds  of  these  diphthongal  signs  are  apparent  from 
a  glance  at  the  key-words  underneath.  The  form  of  the  sign 
of  the  first  three  is  essentially  the  same,  the  only  diflference 
being  in   position  and  the  direction  in  which  it  is  written, 

(1.)  AV^hen  written  with  the  point  downward,  the  angular 
sign  represents  the  first  sound  in  ice,  which  is  a  close  com- 
bination of  ^  and  i:  thus;  ■')  ice,   \  pie,  (^  lie. 

(2.)  When  written  with  the  point  slanting  upward  to  the 
right,  in  the  first-place,  it  represents  the  first  sound  in  oi7, 
which  is  a  close  combination  of  o  and  i;  thus:  r^r'  oil,  ^  bo;/, 

(3.)  When  written  in  the  third-place,  with  the  point  up 
right,  it  represents  the  first  sound  in  our,  which  is  a  close  com- 
bination  of  ah  and  6S;  thus:   a\  otir,  cow. 

A 

(4.)  The  fourth  of  the  series  is  represented  by  a  small  half 
circle,  written  in  the  third-place;  thus:  |^  due,  V_„  few.* 

31.  Tliese  diphthongs  being  all  compound  sounds  are  ajipro- 
priately  represented  by  compound  signs,  and  necessarily,  too, 
as  the  simple  signs  have  all  been  appropriated  by  the  simple 

*  Theoretically  most  Americans  who  have  made  the  subject  of  pro- 
nunciation a  study,  hold  that  the  diphthong  in  diic,  lute,  suit,  ueir,  etc.. 
is  not  exactly  the  same  as  that  heard  in  finite.  Europe,  Eicitig,  diHuuiou, 
etc.  They  say  that  the  former  is  a  pure  diphthong,  resulting  from  a 
close  coalescing  of  1  arid  6o,  or  1  and  <V>,  thus  :  ioo;  while  the  latter  is 
a  combination  .of  the  consonant  y  and  oo,  thus  :  yoo.  The  very  critical 
phonographic  writers  in  this  country,  therefore,  represent  the  pure 
diphthong  thus:   |>  rfi/e,         ^ciiic;  but   the   mixed   diphthong  i/oo 

thus:  vl  nnite.  Practically,  however,  it  is  not  desirable  to  make 
this  nice  distinction,  as  learners  can  not  appreciate  it,  and  skillful 
writers  rarely  insert  cither  sign. 


OF   rilOXOGKiU'HY.  IVJ 


sounds.  When  written  alone,  or  to  a  single  stem, ''  is  regarded 
as  a  first-place  sign,  but  as  there  is  no  danger  of  its  being  mis- 
taken fur  either  of  the  other  signs,  it  is  often  written  in  the 
middle-place,  or  even  in  the  third-place,  when  more  con- 
venient; thus:  v'^  pilr,  L-^  don/,  / like. 

32.  The  sign  ■  is,  of  course,  written  for  the  i)ronoun  /;  and 
the  sign  ^  for  the  i)ronoun  i/(m:  and  '^  for  how. 

liEAmyo  Exercise  I. 

\    1"    U  V"  '\^'  A.  A  w^  r^ 

\  1"  /•  v^  r  ,-^  u  y  ^ 

\  ^  (a  V  ■^  -<i  xi^  k/  ~y~' 

Writing  Exercise  IV. 

Pie,  die,  fie,  vie,  thigh,  sigh,  shy,  lie,  nigh,  knife,  pike,  like, 
type,  ripe,  defy,  revile,  piety. 

Boy,  joy,  hautboy,  foil,  decoy,  annoy,  enjoy,  boiler,   loyal, 
(Jow,  vow,  out,  owl,  fowl,  mow,  allow,  hourly. 
Due,  dupe,  cube,  few;  pure,  fume,  mule,  jury,  fury. 

RULES  FOR  vocalizing. 

38.  The  following  rules  will  guide  the  learner  to  the  best 
method  of  i)lacing  the  vowel  signs: 

(1.)  In  vocalizing  or  inserting  the  V03veJs  of  words  com- 
l)osed  of  two  or  more  con.sonants  it  is  imiM)rtant  to  keep  the 
vowel  signs  away  from  the  inside  of  angles,  jis  in  such  jMisi- 
tions  it  is  impossible  to  tell  to  which  stroke  they  belong; 
therefore,  when  a  first-i)lace  vowel  comes  In-tween  two  conso- 
nants it  is  placed  immediately  after  the  first;  as  \^~v  balm, 


r 

'     40  AMERICAN   MANUAL 


not    before    the    second    consonant,   thus:    v— ^  ;  1 tack, 

not  L  ,  which  might  be  lick  as  well  as  tack. 

(2.)  A  second-place  vowel  coming  between  two  consonants, 
if  it  is  long,  is  also  written  after  the  firet;  as  j  gate, 
V^  dome;    but   if  short,  it  is  written  before  the  second;  as 

•j  get,  \x^  dumb;  by  which  means  the  sounds  of  the  middle- 
place  vowels  may  be  determined,  if  they  should  not  be  clearly 
indicated  by  the  size  of  the  vowel  dot  or  dash. 

(3.)  Third-place  vowels,  whether  long  or  short,  con.iing 
between   two  consonants,  are  written  before  the  second;  as 

^\  keep,  not       '\  ;     I    duty,  not  M  ;  N  boot,  \ !  book. 

(4.)  In  words  beginning  with  the  prefix  syllables  be-,  de-, 
re-,  the  vowel  sign  may  be  omitted,  with  the  understanding 
that  when  the  consonants  b,  d  and  r  are  written  without  a 
vowel  sign  they  are  to  be  read  as  though  the  vowel  e  were 
there;  thus;  \/v   belie,   I       depot,  /\^       revoke. 

(5.)  If  two  vowels  come  between  two  consonants,  the  first 
one  uttered  is  written  to  the  first  stroke,  and  the  next  one  to 
the  second;     v-k  poem. 

(6.)  If  two  vowels,  or  a  diphthong  and  vowel,  precede  the 
first  or  only  consonant  in  a  word,  the  first  one  uttered  is  writ- 
ten farther  from  it  than  the  second;  thus;  "|  iota;  if  a  word 
terminate  with  two,  the  last  is  written  farthest  from  the  conso- 
nant sign;  as  >^v  Ohio. 

(7.)  When  the  diphthong  ■'  begins  a  word,  it  may  often  be 
united  with  the  consonant  following  without  lifting  the  j)en ; 
as  /  icy.  When  the.  diphthong  a  or  «  is  the  final  sound 
in  a  word,  it  may  often  be  written  to  the  preceding  conso- 
nant without  lifting  the  pen ;  thus ;  [^  due,  \^  few,  V\  bow, 
^.^^^noWy     ^^^  new,  (with  part  of  A  andfl) 


OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 


41 


(8.)  In  reading  words  containing  two  or  more  consonants,  it 
must  be  observed  that  each  stroke,  and  the  vowel  sign  or  signs 
placed  to  it,  must  Ik'  read  precisely  as  they  would  l)e  it'  they 
stood  unconnected  with  other  consonant  strokes:  thus  v^  . 
read  in  this  way  would  be  analyzed  thus:   \/    \ •-  pol-it-k; 

and  y^\!i_  thus:  \y'  vy  ter-ifij.  This  analysis,  in  the  mind, 
will  Ix;  necessary,  only  for  a  short  time,  until  the  learner  can 
read  Avords  from  their  general  appearance. 

Eeadinu  Exercise  II. 


V  \^  /^.  ^  /il  /^.  n.  1-  x1 


^  ). 


•  Writing  Exercise  V. 

Bar  back;  car,  catch;  bake,  beck;  bait,  bet;  dale,  dell; 
fail,  fell;  lake,  leg;  mail,  mellow;  peach,  pitch;  cheap,  chip; 
meal,  mill;  mealy,  miller;  gaudy,  copy;  bore,  burr;  shore, 
shove;  booty,  pully;  badly,  purely;  Fanny,  funny;  heavy, 
handy,  ahead;  lazy,  fellow;  holy,  honey;  haughty,  hollow; 
chide,  chime;   boiler,  jiower. 

May  I  write  my  name?    You  may  now  read.     I  enjoy   oun/ 
ride.     You  may  leave  my  room.     I  love  my  lively  boy.    -^X 


42  AMERICAN    MANLAL 


Rules  fob  Writixg  L  and  R. 

34.  The  following  rules  will  enable  the  learner  to  deter- 
mine when  to  write  ^  I  upward  and  when  downward,  and 
when  to  use  the  downward  and  u])ward  forms,     A   and  /    r. 

(1.)  When  I  or  r  is  the  first  letter  in  a  word,  write  the 
sien  upward,  as  ^  like,  (^""^  lame,  ^  ray,  /C|  road, 
/  rock,  y\  roar.  Exception :  when  "^^  is  immediately 
followed  by  r~x,  it  is  better  to  write  the  downward  stroke,  as 
~^V--  roam,  i^  remedy;  though  many  prefer  to  preserve 
uniformity,  and  write      J^^  roam,      y'~~\_  remove,  etc. 

(2.)  When  /  or  r  is  the  first  consonant  in  a  word,  but 
preceded  by  a  vowel,  we  usually  write    the   down-stroke ;   as 

/^     alike,    /^  along,     "S^   era,      \ argue.    ~^y^  hourly, 

Exception:  when  (^  ox  /  is  immediately  followed  by  a 
down-stroke  sign,  the  upstroke  must  be  used;  as  /^  allowed, 
(^  allege,    yi^  arrayed,  ^,,>^  urge,     yf  earth. 

(3.)  When  r  ia  the  final  sound  in  a  word,  the  down-stroke 
form  is  generally  written;  but  when  r  is  the  last  consonant, 
followed  by  a  vowel  sound,  the  up-stroke  is  used;  as    \__6<»r, 

\y-  berry;  "^     \gm'e,   /' 9ory,^<L.iirc,\^- fury;    and 

when  a  downward  ^  r  would  carry  the  pen  more  than  one 
stroke  below  the  line,  and  when  r  follows  r  at  the  end  of  a 
word,  the  up-stroke  is  used;  as    \.  ^  prepare,     {y^  furor, 

(4.)  Final  (^   I  is  generally  written  downward  after  V^^   / 

V     V,  v_^  M,  ^*-^  ng  and  up-stroke  ^  r;  as  S'  feel,     V^  rile, 

y^    kingly,       ^^^f     roll.     After   other 'consonants,  and 

especially,  when  followed   by    a   vowel  sound,  it  is  written 

upward ;     as  \/     pile,  ^-j-J^  mail,   \„J^'  valley,  ^^/^'  gaily, 

y^^     relay. 


V. 


OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 


43 


Eeading  ^nd  Copying  Exercise  IX. 


V 


Ir- 


Writing  Exercise  VI. 

Lake,  elk;   limb,  elm;  luckily,  alkali;  laying,  along. 
Row,  oar;  robe,  ot>^;  rock,  argue;  rainy,  early. 
Rake,  ark;  rebuke,   Europe;  rear,  arrear;  rarity,  arrive. 
Pair,  parry;  beer,   berry;  tare,  tarry;  dare,  dairy. 
Cheer,  cherry;  care,  carry;  fair,  fairy;  revere,  vary. 
Bar,  barrier;  car,  carrier;  mar,  merrier;  infer,  inferior. 
Fail,  folly;  vale,  valley;  rail,   rally;  i)eril,  poorly. 

Army,  rum;  elbow,  alive,  alarm,  allude,  arch,  arid,  calmly, 
canal;  jeer,  Jerry;  mayor,  Mary;  lower,  Leroy;  inure,  nar- 
row; fur,  furrier. 


-^ 


•i4  AMERICAN   MANUAL 


REVIEW   OF   THE    THIRD   LESSOX. 

( ^  25. )  How  dt>  the  short  vowels  differ  from  the  long  ?  ( J  26. )  Give 
the  sounds  of  the  first  three.  •  How  are  they  written  ?  The  last 
three?  (i^27.)  What  are  the  names  of  the  short  vowels?  (^28.) 
Sound  the  long  and  short  dot  vowels  in  conjunction.  {^  30.  ;  What  are 
the  sounds  of  the  diphthongs?  How  written?  (^31.)  How  may  the 
sign  /  be  written,  as  to  place?  (if  32. )  Which  of  the  diphthongs  are 
word-sign*?  (jJ33.)  When  a  first-place  vowel  comes  between  two 
consonants,  to  which  is  it  written?  To  which  are  the  middle-place 
vowels  written  ?  Third-place?  When  may  the  third-place  vowel  e  be 
omitted?  When  two  vowel  sounds  come  between  two  consonants,  how 
are  their  signs  written?  When  two  vowels  precede  or  follow  a  conso- 
nant, how  are  the  signs  written?  Which  of  the  diphthongs  may  be 
joined  to  consonant  stems,  and.  when?  (34.)  What  is  the  rule  for 
writing  initial?  and  r?  What  the  exception?  How  are  I  and  r 
written  if  a  vowel  precede  them  at  the  beginning  of  words?  What 
the  exception?  What  is  the  rule  for  writing  r  when  it  is  the  last 
consonant  in  a  word  and  followed  by  a  vowel?  What  is  the  rule 
for  writing  I  when  the  last  consonant  in  a  word  and  is  followed  by 
a  vowel?     What  are  the  exceptions  to  this  rule? 


-^ 

OF   PHONOGRAPHY.  40 


^tiiir(I|  ^0$$oit> 


THE  S  AND  Z  CIRCLE,  ST  LOOP,  ETC. 

The  fact  that  s  and  z  represent  sounds  of  very  frequent 
occurrence,  renders  it  necessary,  in  order  to  seciire  the  greatest 
brevity  and  lineality  in  writing,  tliat  they  be  furnished  with 
an  additional  sign.  Indeed  each  subsequent  lesson  is  but  to 
introduce  some  more  abbreviated  method  of  writing,  wliich, 
while  it  seems  to  render  the  system  more  complex,  adds  to  it 
new  beauty  as  well  as  value. 

85.  The  second  form  for  s  and  2  is  a  small  circle,  made 
light  for  the  former,  and  thickened  on  one  side  for  the  latter ; 
thus;  o,<<,  02;  the  thickening  of  the  z-circle,  however,  is 
scarcely  ever  necessary,  as  the  sense  will  nearly  always  indi- 
i-ate  whether  the  circle  should  be  s  or  2.  Where  precision  ia 
requisite,  tlie  stroke  z  should  be  used. 

The  "circle-ess,"  as  it  is  called,  to  distinguish  it  from  the 
stroke  )  s,  is  used  nuich  more  frequently  than  the  latter;  it  is 
employed,  however,  only  in  connection  with  stroke  consonants, 
except  as  word-signs.  It  affords  J^most  wonderful  facility  for 
joining  both  straight  and  curved  strokes,^  and  in  a  graceful 
and  fluent  manner. 

.'!tJ  The  table  on  the  following  page  will  assist  the  learner  to 
fix  in  his  mind  the  mode  of  writing  the  circle  to  each  of  the 
I<nig  signs;  it  will  also  l)e  of  service  for  reference  in  writing 
out   tile  exercises  in  the  writinu-  lesson. 


V. 


46  AMERICAN   MANUAL 


vj"^  TABLE  OF  THE  CIRCLE  S. 

\    sp   \     sb    f    St    r    sd  /^  s-ch   /*  sj    Q_   sk     a_   sg 

\_    sf  ^    sv  \     s-th   \    s-th    j    ss    j    sz   _y  s-sh   J/  s-zh 
(^      si        \  sr    q/     sr    g—>^  sin    q_^     sn    q_^    sng       >    sw 

BG,  The  y  and  A  signs  never  take  an  initial  circle,  but  it  is 
written  to  the  termination  of  each;  thus:  g  ys,  /  lis.  The 
table  represents  the  circle  written  only  at  the  initial  end  of 
the  strokes,  whereas  it  may  be  written  at  either  end  or  at 

both  ends;  thus:\Qps,  d  A:s,  , — j,  ms,     3  ws,  ^  sfe,  q_p  sm; 

and  it  is  also  written  between  stroke  consonants;  as  J — .   Ul, 
^-'-■'N^  rsp^  — ^^   gsls,       ^^    sii.snt. 

37.  Observe  that  the  circle  is  written  only  on  the  right-hand 
side  of  perpendicular  and  inclined  straight  strokes,  excepting 
upstroke  r,  which  is  nearer  horizontal  than  vertical ;  and  on 
the  inner  or  concave  sides  of  curved  signs. 

38.  Wlien  the  circle  comes  between  two  strokes,  it  is  turned 
in  the  shortest  and  easiest  way ;  thus,  between  two  straight 
strokes  forming  an  angle,  it  is  turned   outside,  as  ^ bsk, 

tsjj;  between  two  curved  strokes,  turning  in  opposite  direc- 


tions, it  is  turned  on  the  inside  of  the  first;  as   . — 5--^   iiisn, 

^^  msv.     In  a  few    instances  it   is    necessary   to   make 

exceptions  to  this  last  rule,  in  order  to  keep  consonants  from 

running  too  far  below  the  line  of  writing;  as  ^^'"j.  J'aci/ifi/, 

^-^V  vassalage. 

39.  In  vocalizing  words  in  which  the  circle  s  is  used,  the 
vowel  signs  are  placed  to  the  strokes  before  which  or  after 
which  tliey  are  heard,  just  as  if  they  had  no  circle  attached  ; 
as,    ,1   eat.,     j    mii,       /n      low,     (^    slow,   — -    key,    _d   keys, 

.1    succeed. 


J 


r 


OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


47 


Heading  and  Copying  ExEucisii  X. 

y  ^    ^    ^     c    ^    y  ^^/^-.-^ 

^"^  u_p  c^  '^-^  r^  r^  r^  Ao  5-/^  V 
^M  \^  Vp  v^  K  L.  V.  ^-r^J^.  ^^-1-- 
_.^  __^  __r"  ^^^  ^V"  .-^r  r^n  rA 
'^v^  ''-I  r\.  v\o  /"^.-ri  -t-,  -^  n^ 
>  "^  r  ^  ^  ^^  ~^^  '^v-.  ^  V  <^  j^ 


V P  o/ 


?--^ 


--^^  ^n  v7v_. 


\  -^"k  -^-^  "S  -^  ^ 


„^ 


.y 


48  AMERICAN   MANUAL 


40.  In  reading  words  containing  the  circle  s,  if  there  is  an 
initial  circle,  it  is  read  first,  as  it  is  written  first ;  next  the 
vowel  sign  preceding  the  stroke,  if  there  be  one;  then  the 
stroke;  the  vowel-sign  following  the  stroke;  and  lastly' the 
final  circle;  thus:  (  said,  )^^  suppose,  \^  spice,  ^_  cities 
\^  suffice,  "^Qy^   sorrows. 

41.  It  is  sometimes  impossible  to  insert  correctly  the  third- 
place  vowels  in  the  forms  for  words  in  which  the  circle  s 
occurs,  in  which  cases  they  are  omitted,  as  in  Kule  4  for 
vocalizing,  page  40;  thus:  \''~'~^  beslime,  J-<^  ihsirous, 
J-^^  disrobe,  ^^T^  restore.  These  omissions  are  in  accord- 
ance with  the  practice  of  advanced  writers,  who  omit  all 
except  the  accented  vowels,  reporters  omitting  all  vowels. 

Reading  Exercise  III. 

^    ^    6r    ^      f     vP     /~'     a_.     ^     ^? 


V  Whiting  Exercise  YH. 

Spy,  sky,  stay,  slay,  sly,  sway,  snow. 

Pays,  bows,  days,  dose,  lays,  laws,  loose,  rays,  rose,  ways, 
woes,  amaze.  Peace,  tease,  cheese,  choose,  keys,  cause,  geese, 
goes.     Face,   fees,  sees,  size,  lease,  release. 

Sap,  sip,  sob,    sop,    s<»ap,   s«jup;    sage,    side,   said,    sowed, 


OF  PHONOGRAPHY,  49 


siege,  such,  seek,  soak,  south,  siish,  sell,  soul,  same,  sum, 
sign,  soon,  sink,  sunk.  • 

SpaJe,  sjx^ed,  six)ke,  scheme,  sphere,  sleep,  slack,  smoke, 
smell,  scale,  swell,  swill,  swam,  swallow. 

Bestow,  beset,  deceit,  decide,  task,  bask,  gasp,  rasp,  ma.sk, 
wa.sp;  space,  specify,  stays,  skies,  suffice,  slice,  recite,  denies, 
reason,  chosen,  hasten,  mason,  moisten,  noisily,        , 


LAROE  CIRCLE  SEZ—LOOVyi  <vr  AN!)  STR. 

42.  When  the  souu,ds  of  s  and  z  occur  in  connection  with 
some  other  consonant,  in  such  .syllables  sis  sis,  ses,  si/s,  sus,  cise, 
they  may  generally  be  represented  by  writing  a  large  circle, 
double  the  usu;il  siz3  f  jr  s;  \o*  pieces,  Ps  system,  J.  necessity, 
_^^j>^  exercise.  The  vowel,  or  diphthong,  may  be  written 
inside  the  circle,  but  it  is  .seldom  necessary.  A  small  circle  .-* 
may  be  added  to  the  largo  circle;  thus:      ■  g  ercesses. 

43.  As  another  means  of  keeping  the  forms  of  words  from 
running  too  far  below  the  line  of  writing  the  circle  s  is  length- 
ened to  a  loop  one-third  the  length  of  the  stroke,  for  the  addi- 
tion of  /,  and  .sometimes  d;  thus,  we  write  ^^  base,  x>  Ixtsed; 
■^\d    refuse,  y^\^  refused,  J^  dismissed. 

44.  By  lengthening  the  loop  to  two-thirds  the  length  of  the 
stroke,  it   bei-omes  str;  as   Xi  boaster,  t-^^"  coster,  ^^foster. 

The  circle  s  may  also  1x  added  to  these  loops;  as  ^:^  posts, 
^  rests;  ^<^  festers,  ^^^  vmsfers. 

The  st  loop  is  also  written  initially  and  medially;  thus: 
^  X  ^^'^'P  /^  ■'^f^'V,   (f^  ^f'J^^j  -^    justify,   (f7-^  statistics. 

EXCEPTIONS  TO  THE  USE  OF  CIRCLE  .S". 

45.  There  are  certain  classes  of  words  in  which  the  long  s 
and  z  must  l>e  employed:  Fii-st  when  s  or  2  is  the  only  stroke 
cons(jnant  in  a  woid;  as   )    eaay,    ;    smr ;  second,  when  it  is 


50  /  AMERICAN   MANUAL 

the  first   consonant,  and  preceded  by  a  vowel;  as  *) ask, 

■} escape;  third,  when  two   distinct   vowel   sounds   come 

between   the  s  and  following   consonant;   as  m  )J^  science, 
<  ^  joyous;  fourth,  when  «  or  2  is  the  last  consonant  in  a 

word,  and   followed  by   a  vowel:   as   ^^O""  «^<';  ^O.  rosy; 
fifth,  when  z  begins  a  word;  as  \^{    zero,  yK^  zealous. 

4G.  When  s-s  or  s-z  are  the  only  consonants  in  a  word,  they 
may  be  written  \,  or  %  or  ^ ;  if  the  word  terminate  with 
the  sound  of  «,  it  is  better  to  use  the  first;  as  Y  sauce;  if  it 
terminate  with  a  vowel,  use  the  second,  as  "  ^  saucy;  if 
it  terminate  with  2,  use  the  latter,  as  -^  size. 

Reading  and  Copying  Exercise  XI. 

Y     \>    -^    ^    ^    ^^  .^  \  -Y    ''-^ 

/Vo       0-^%      "%^     ^        ._^       o-V      \o     ^  a_p 

\>    i    f    "-^    ^  '-^    r   n)  ^^    r 
^    ^^  ^    K   U    y\.  ^^^  \p    i^    I 


OF   PHONOGKAPHY.  51 

THE  COMBINATION   J//'  OR   .V/i. 

47.  A  very  simple  combination  of  consonant  sounds  is  that 
of  mp  or  mb;  and  it  is  appropriately  represented  by  simply 
thickening  the  sign  ^—^  ?/j,  for  the  addition  of  p  or  b ;  thus: 
z^""^^'  Ihnp,  '"^"^  empire,  l-yv/f  temporal,  ^^.^^  embarrass. 

As  ---N  is  not  written  heavy,  or  thick,  for  any  single  sound, 
this  use  of  it  will  not  cause  any  confusion.  In  writing  words 
in  which  p  and  b  are  silent,  the  --^  need  not  be  thickened; 
such  words  as  limb,  dumb,  tempt,  should  be  written  as  though 
they  were  spelled  Hm,  diim,  temt. 


<b  b  ^  ^  /^v  .^  ^  ^  ^°-  ^. 


Teases,  causes,  gases,  voices,  misses,  opposes^  -revises,  posses- 
sor, resist,  desist,  exhaust,  decisive,  discusses,  emphasises. 

Taste,  co?t,  fast,  last,  safest,  repast,  arrest,  disposed,  amazed; 
steps,  stakes,  stiff,  stir,  still,  stock,  steadfast;  pastor,  buster; 
faster,  lustre;  posts,  costs,  lasts,  musters,  monsters.    , 


52  AMKKICAX    MAXl.U, 


LOGOGRAMS,  OR  WORD-SIGNS. 

48.  By  a  word-dgn  is  meant  the  use  of  a  single  character  of 
the  shorthand  aljjhabet  to  represent  an  entire  word.  This 
scheme  is  in  accordance  with  the  custom  in  the  common  spell- 
ing, of  writing  i.  e.,  for  that  is;  e.  g.,  for  example ;  p.  in.,  post 
meridian,  or  afternoon;  Gen.,  for  General,  etc.;  and  it  is  resorted 
to  for  the  purpose  of  saving  time  and  labor  in  writing. 

Those  words  are  chosen  thus  to  be  represented  which  occur 
the  most  frequently  in  composition,  twenty-five  of  them 
actually   constituting  one-fourth  of   any  ordinary  discourse. 

The  signs  are  chosen  so  as  to  suggest,  generally,  the  words 
they  represent.  Words  thus  represented  are  called  sign-words, 
or  grammalogues,  while  the  signs  themselves  are  called 
word-signs,  or  logograms.     (See  page  19.) 

VOWEL    WORD-SIGNS. 
/ 


a  or  an 

and 

the 

aye 

ah 

\ 

\ 

■ 

1 

/ 

^ 

all 

two  or  too 

0, 

oh,  owe 

before           i 

Ugllt 

who 

N 

\                   1 

/ 

'  (yr^ 

A 

rs 

of  to  but        should  1  how  you 

49.  Only  two  places,  the  first  and  third  or  above  and  on 
the  line,  are  used  in  writing  the  vowel  word-signs,  because 
without  a  consonant  sign  it  would  be  impossible  to  determine 
between  a  first  and  second-place  position.  If  tlie  word  to  be 
represented  contain  a  first-place  vowel  sound,  the  sign  is  writ- 
ten above  the  top  line  ;  if  a  second  or  third-place  vowel,  it  is 
written  on  the  line,  with  but  few  exceptions. 


«i'  riroxoGHAPHY.  53  ' 


CONSONANT    WORD-SIGNS. 


\' 

\ 

1      1 

/      / 

— 



up 

v.. 

bo 

it         do 
( 

whicli     largo 

(         ) 

can        come         go      give-n 

)        J       J 

for 

r 

.     have 

think 

iheui           so 

was 

shall     usual-ly 

will 

her,  or  i 

are 

my,  time 

r 

me,  may 

on,  any      in,  no 
/ 

long, 

language 

thing 

your 

o 

way 

0 

he 

important-co     improve-ment        as  is 

50.  In  the  above,  and  all  other  lists  of  word-signs,  when  a 
word  is  printed  with  a  hyphen,  as  give-n,  the  sign  will  repre- 
sent either  the  whole  word,  or  only  so  much  as  precedes  the 
hyphen,  which  is,  by  itself  another  word:  thus  ___  is  either 
give  or  given.  Such  words,  being  nearly  alike  in  sound  and 
meaning,  cause  no  difficulty  to  the  reader. 

51.  Inasmuch  as  the  horizontal  strokes  do  not  fill  the  space 
which  a  line  01  writing  occupies,  they  are  made  to  represent 
two  words,  by  being  placed  in  different  positions;  as  in  the 
case  of  the  vowel  word-signs,  one  above  the  top  line  and  the 
other  on  the  bottom  line — the  sign-words  of  those  written 
above  the  line  generally  containing  first-place  vowels;  those 
on  the  lino,  second  or  tliir(l-})lac(\  There  are  but  few  excep- 
tions to  this  rule,  one  of  wliicli  is  in  the  word  any  in  the 
above  table:  though  its  vowel  is  second-place,  the  '^  is  writ- 
ten above  the  line,  so  that  it  will  not  conflict  with  ^^  no, 
on  the  line;  go,  having  a  second-place  vowel,  is  written  above 
the  line,  so  that  give  may  be  written  on  the  line  and  to  keej) 


54  AMERICAN    MANIAI. 

ffo  from    conflicting  with  co)iic,  in  the  second  position,  if  it 
should  accidentally  be  written  heavy. 

52.  The  circle  s  may  be  added  to  any  consonant  sign,  to 
represent  the  plural  or  the  possessive  case  of  nouns,  or  the 
third-person  singular  of  verbs;  thus:  \^  its,  v,^  things, 
D   conifs,  [^  docs. 

JOINING  OF  WORDS. 

53.  The  words  a,  an  and  the  are  of  such  frequent  occurrence 
that  provision  is  made  for  joining  them  to  preceding  word- 
signs,  and  to  many  other  words,  by  a  short  tick,  which  saves 
much  time  in  the  aggregate  by  not  lifting  the  pen;  thus, 
^  of-the,  ^  to-th^,  V  but-the,  ^~^  in-the,  ^  which-thc;  ^~-'^  in-a, 
c_  a&.a,  \  for-a  or  for-an,  |_  Co-a,  etc.  The  is  represented 
by  a  tick  written  at  an  acute  angle  to  the  preceding  sign ;  a 
or  an,  by  a  tick  written  at  a  right  angle  to  the  preceding  sign. 
The  tick  for  the  is  also  frequently  used  to  represent  the  word 
he,  as  ~7  can  ]ic,  V     for  he,    p     is-the,  or  is-he.  (See  page  86.) 

This  principle  of  joining  is  applied  to  all  other  word-signs 
that  join  well ;  as  <.-^  he-may,  \^  it-is,  \ become,  -a^  to-be. 

Additional    Word-Signs.  —  The    very    common    words 

first  '\^  and p  next  are  thus  abbreviated.     Ah  '^  and  is  ^ , 

already  given,      are  also  used  for  the  representation  of  has  ° 
and  ^  his. 

54.  Punctuation,  etc. — On  account  of  the  use  of  the  dot 
for  words,  in  phonographic  writing,  we  thus  write  the  points: 
X  period,  X  colon,  *^  interrogation,  [  wonder,  ^  sorrow, 
?  laughter,  (  )  parentheses;,  the  comma,  semi-colon  and 
quotation  marks,  may  be  written  as  in  common  manuscript. 
When  it  is  desired  to  indicate  that  a  word  should  begin  with 
a  capital  letter,  write  two  parallel  lines  under  it,  thus : 
O  fn  ^^/'•-  >^">'fh- 


OF   PHOJSOGRAPHY.  55 


Reading  Exercise  V. 


X 


y^    •         6      y^      ^^      --^     ^     -j/3        /^' 


^,  Exercise  ox  the  Word-Sigxs. 

The  first  thing  to  do  is  usually  of  importance.  You  should 
think  as  I  do.  But  are  you  or  I  to  give  up?  How  long  will 
it  be  as  a  usual  thing?  I  too  shall  have  to  improve  my 
language.  All  of  them  ought  to  be  as  large  as  the  first. 
You  will  uo^'  go  on  your  way.  For  he  ought  to  go  in 
before  me.  Which  way  will  you  go  now?  You  have  a  large 
and  imiwrtant  improvement.  It  was  in  no  way  as  large  as 
the  first.  I  think  you  may  do  .so  for  her.  Have  you  any 
thing  of  importance  to  do?     You  can  come  and  go  as  usual. 


56  A.MEKKAX    MAXIAL 

Writing  Exercise  IX. 

-iVbtc— Words  that  are  connected  by  hyphens  should  b?  written 
together  without  lifting  the  pen. 

Honesty  is-the  lx?st  policy  all-the-time. 
The  richest  miser  is-a  shive  to-his  riches. 
Your  duty  to-your  family  comes  first. 
A  thing  of  beauty  is-a  joy  for-you  and  for-me. 
The  animal  exists  and  subsists  on-the  food-he  eats. 
He  who  asks  justice  should-be  ready  to  give  it. 
The  wisest  and-the  best  are-the  purest  of  earth. 
The  use  of  steam  was-a  most  important  improvement. 
Many  who-are  first  .shall-be  Ia.*t,  and-the  last,  first. 
Two  fools  in-a  house  are  too-many  by  two. 
Think  to-day  and  sjxiak  to-morrow.  -.. 

Be  zealous  in  business,  but  be  no  slave  to-it. 
Ask  wisely,  and-it  shall-be  given  unto  you. 
'^It-is  no  avail  to  fast  if-you-are  next  to  ft^ast. 
Laziness  is  said  to-be-a  hoiK-less  disease.       b 
Most  things  have   two  sides  to-them,   and-ijt-is  best   tcv- 
look  at  both.  '.        -— " 

REVIEW   OF   THE   FOURTH   LESSOX.     v'    ^_J 

(  §35.)  On  which  side  of  straight  strokes  is  the  circle  «  written? 
On  which  side  of  curves  ?  ( ^  3C. )  AVhich  signs  never  take  the  circle  s 
initially?  (^  38.)  How  is  the  circle  written  between  the  straight 
strokes?  How  between  the  curved  strokes?  (§  39.)  When  a  vowc-L  is 
written  before  a  stroke  beginning  with  a  circle,  which  is  read  first,  the 
vowel  or  the  circle  ?  (  ?  41-  )  When  may  tliird-i>lacc  vowels  be  omitted  ? 
(g  42.)  In  what  classes  of  words  is  the  large  circle  used?  (^  H.)  How 
is  the  st  loop  written,  and  in  what  cases  is  it  used?  (§  44.)  How  is 
the  »tr  loop  written,  and  when  used?  How  may  the  circle*  be  written 
after  the  loop?  (§  45.)  In  what  cases  is  it  necessary  to  write  the 
stroke  s  orz?  (§  46.)  In  words  having  only  the  consonants  »-«  or  s-z, 
in  what  cases  should  the  form  begin  with  the  one  or  the  other?  (  ^  47.  ) 
IIow  is  the  combination  mp  or  jm6  represented?  (J4S. )  What  is  the 
principle  on  which  word-signs  are  formed? 


OF   rilOXOGRAPHY.  57 


ifilt   Jm^iu 


INITIAL  HOOKS  FOR  L  AXD  i?. 

55.  A  peculiar  clianictcristic  of  the  souuds  of  I  and  r  is, 
that  they  freely  blend  with  other  preceding  consonants,  form- 
ing double  sounds  as  it  were,  similar  to  the  vowel  diphthongs, 
and  hence  their  classification  as  liquids.  Take,  for  illustra- 
tion, jjlay  and  apjjk,  Jiy  and  fickle,  and  observe  how  almost 
simultaneously  the  letters  pi,  fl,  and  kl  are  uttered,  the  I 
gliding  imperceptibly  into  each  of  the  others;  take,  also,  the 
words  pr(ty,  try,  eager,  and  in  pronouncing  them  notice  how, 
in  each  case,  the  pr,  tr,  gr,  glide  into  almost  a  single  eflfort 
of  articulation. 

5G.  The  briefest  and  most  philosophical  way  of  representing 
these  combinations  of  I  and  r  with  the  preceding  conso- 
nants, is  by  distinct  and  uniform  modifications  of  such  conso- 
nants. Very  simple  modifications  are  provided,  by  a  small 
initial  hook  on  one  side  of  the  straight  strokes  for  r,  and  on 
the  other  side  for  I;  thus: 

^\    Pr,        \    pi,       ]     tr,  f     tl,        ^  kr,       _  kl. 

57.  These  compound  strokes  must  be  regarded  primarily 
as  single,  indivisible  signs,  and  spoken  as  such  in  analyz- 
ing or  spelling  out  words,  as  well  as  in  naming  the  signs; 
that  is,  as  the  final  syllables  in  apple'Xjd),  little  (tl),  taper 
(pr),  acre  (kr),  etc.;  and  not  as  p-l;  t-l;  p-r;  k-r.  A 
distinction  is  thus  made  between  b-r  as  in  \/\  borrow,  and 
br  as  in  A  ,  brov ;  Z-r  as  in  — /^'  carry,  and  ^t  as  in 
c^  crow;  b-l  as  in  \^  below,  and  hi  as  in    \    blow. 


58 


AMERICAN    MAXLAL 


ILLUSTRATION  OF  TUE  /MIOOK. 


pr 


tr 
r\  chr 


kr  C 


TABLE  OF  THE  R-HOOK. 

%  pr   X  l>f      1    tr      1  dr     ^  c^-r     /^  V   ^~  ^^ 


gr 


<^  fr     y^  vr     r  or  ")  th-r     f  or  ")  th-r    J  sh-r    J  zh-r 
^   Ir       ^/  rr       /^- yr     ^  wr 


mr      <^.^  nr 


58.  To  assist  the  pupil  in  rexnemlx;riug  these  hooks,  or 
compound  signs,  the  above  illustrations  are  given.  If  the 
Right  hand  be  held  up,  and  the  fore-finger  bent  aa  in  the 
cut,  the  outline  |  tr  will  he  seen;  and,  by  turning  the 
hand  round  to  the  four  different  positions,  all  the  straight 
double  consonants  of  the  Pr  series  will  lie  indicated.  In 
other  words,  the  R-hook  is  indicated  by  the  Right  hand, 
except  as  to  a  few  cur^^ed  strokes, 

59.  On  all  the  curved  signs  the  hook  is  written  on  the 
concave,  or  inner  side,  because  of  its  more  easy  formation 
there  than  on  the  outside  of  a  curve. 

60.  The  combinations  sr,  zr^  being  more  readily  written 
by  the  «-circle,  thus,  *^  ^^^  than  by  the  forms  '^)  ^, 
these-  latter  are  used  as  duplicates  for  the  frequently  recur- 
ring fhr,  light  and  heavy.  Being  similar  in  form  and 
position,  this  irregularity  will  not  make  any  trouble.  The 
first  forms  C  f,  are  used  when  preceded  by  a  vowel,  as: 
"T  author,  C  either;  the  second  forms  are  used  when 
followed    by    a    vowel,    as;      i-  throw,   ^     thrice;    in    other 


OF  PHONOGRAPHY.  o9 


combinations,  whichever  form  i.s  most  convenient  is  used, 
as;     )    there,  f    •)  leather. 

(!l.  The  use  of  lieavy  m  and  n  in  forming  the  r  hook, 
as  (T^  mr,  <.^  >ir,  is  rendered  necessary  by  the  fact  that 
the  same  forms  written  light  are  needed  for  another  i>ur- 
l)ose  in  the  further  development  of  the  system.     As  mp  ^^ 

and  iKj  s do  not  require  this  hook,    there   is   no   danger 

of  ambiguity  resulting  from  this  use  of  them. 

(52.  The  vocalization  is  the  same  as  with  the  simple 
strokes;  if  a  vowel  i)recedes  the  double  consonant  it  is 
written  before,  or  aljove  the  stroke,  as  -J  tdter,  -|  odor, 
c — -  eager,  ;;;j^  owner;  if  a  vowel  follow  the  double  conso- 
nant it  is  written  after,  or  under  the  stroke,  as;    1      true, 

THE  SPJi  SERIES  OF  CONSONANTS. 

63.  From  the  pr  series  of  double  consonants  a  series  of 
trii)le  consonants  is  formed,  by  prefixing  the  s-circle  to  the 
?"-hook  ;  thus,  '^\nj)per,  ^/\^  supper.  As  the  simple  s-circle  is 
never  written  on  the  r-hook  side  of  straight  strokes,  this  new 
circle  is  made  to  rcp>^esent  both  circle  and  hook;  thus: 

\     spr      *\    sbr       ']    str       ^    sdr      ^ —  skr  -,  sgr 

G4.  A  vowel  may  be  written  either  before  or  after  these 
triple  signs;  but  the  circle-s  is  the  first  thing  to  be  read, 
then  the  vowel  ])receding  the  stroke,  if  there  is  one,  next 
the  stroke  and  hook,  and  the  following  vowel;  thus; 
■  1  cider,  g_  mceor,  '^ ,    spree,   %   strai/,  '^N^.:;-^  supreme. 

65.  The  double  circle  may  also  be  written  on  this  side 
of  the  stroke,  making  the  quadruple  combination,  as  in 
"    sister. 

66.  On  the  curved  strokes  the  «-circle  must  Tje  written 
completely  before  forming  the  hook,  since  the  combination 


60  AMEKICAX    MAXIAI. 

has  to  occupy  the  circle  side  of  the  stems;  thus: 
^  suffer,  \^  sever,  ^  seizure,  ^^  summer,  %^  sooner;  and 
these  five  are  the  only  ones  on  which  there  is  occiusion 
to  use  it. 

67.  When    "^   «pr,    I     str,  jj_  shr,   follow   a    preceding 
stroke,  the  hook  must  bedistinctly  formed;  thus:    "^~^\o 
express,  ~^^^\^  extreme,      6\  j-j/'os/^tr. 

68.  There  are  a  few  combinations  in  which  it  is  inijwssi- 
blc  to   form    very,  distinct   hooks   in   connection    Avith    the 

«-circle,  and  imperfect  ones  have  to  suffice ;  thus :      ^v 

subscribe,    [^   n  disgrace.  "^ 

■  SPECIAL  SCHEME  OF  VOCALIZATION. 

69.  Although  the  double  consonants  of  the  spr  ^\^  sdr  ^ 
scries  are  generally  employed  where  no  vowel  intervenes, 
or  only  an  indistinct  one,  convenience  and  brevity  require 
that  a  little  license  should  be  taken  with  the  rule,  and 
therefore  the  double  consonants  are  used  occasionally  even 
Avhen  the  vowel  sound  is  distinctly  heard  between  the 
stroke  and  the  hook.         • 

70.  When  this  is  done  a  peculiar  scheme  of  vocalization 
is  resorted  to,  namely:  the  dot  vowels  are  indicated  by  a 
small  circle  placed  in  each  of  the  three  positions,  before  the 
stroke  for  the  long,  and  after  for  the   short  vowels;   thus: 

°T dari,  ^^'  dearly,  ^^oy'^ careless,    '\/^  ]jaralyze^    %~^ 

t€7'm ;  when  a  dash  vowel  is  to  he  read  between  tlie  stroke 
and  hook,  it  is  indicated  by  striking  the  dash  through  the 
stroke ;  as  c+°  course,  ']__  Turhey ;  or,  Avhen  it  is  a  first- 
place  dash  vowel  it  may  be  written  just  in  front  of  the  hoolj; 
thus:  i(;.„,<—s/^  normal;  when  a  third-place  diphthong,  it 
may  be  written  through  the  stroke;  thus:  "^  jyOg^Mrt;  or 
thu:?:    Vc— ir,  figure.  '  ^ 


OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 


Gl 


71. /MIOOK  WORD-SIGNS.  , 

\^  principle-al,    \  re-inenibcr,      j  true,  truth,      |   dear.  Dr. 

^^ —   Christian,    c — '.    care,      /    larger,    Q       from,     \^  cver-y 

C   other,     ^    there,  their,    J)  sure,    ^  pleasure,    "^  error, 

"^   wear,      ^^  more,    (;^  Mr.,    ^^-^  nor,    ;,_^  near. 

EEADIXG   ExiiRCISE  VI. 

•^  \  -J  ^  ^)  3    ^  ^  \^ 

^         r        cr-T       1-^       ^-     "^       %      ^^"^      .^      ^ 


^^  U-  Vi>  -^.   %>  "x  v_  v_  ^-^^x 


^-  ^  ^  A'  ^ 


62  AMKHIC.VN    MANIAL 


WraTiNG  Exercise  X. 

Dry,  dray,  tree,  pray,  cry,  grow,  dream,  bridge ;  acre,  odor, 
upi)er,  April;  brass,  cross,  trace;  fry,  freak  fresh,  tlirow, 
shriek,  Friday;  olier,  over,  honor,  mover,  minor,  dinner, 
wager,  framer,  transpose,  transfer. 

Spry,  stray,  strike,  struck,  strap,  strip,  strange,  string, 
scrap,  scrajje,  scream ;  supi)er,  sober,  sadder,  sii2)remacy, 
secrecy;    ssifer,    sinner,   summer,   brisker,   proscribe. 

Charm,  dark,  sharp,  sharper,  cheerless,  nearer,  thirty, 
perverse,  norlh,  enormous,  enormity,  coarsely,  work,  morality, 
nourish,   journey,    i^urchase,    erasure,    Yarmouth. 

Error  is  sure  to-be  exposed  to  sharp,  criticism. 

Danger  is  said  to-be  next  neighbor  to  security. 

He  is-a  pretty  fellow  to  take  care  of  prisoners. 

The    dear  Doctor   rarely  brings-a  prize  to  shore. 

True  courage  grows  strong  from  vigorous  exercise. 

A  dry  summer  brings  small  crops  for-the  harvest. 

Truth  aiid  honesty  are  sure  t<^)-receive  favor  at-last. 

All   proper   promises  are  supposed  to-be  free  from  error. 

Every  member  of-a  Christian  church  should  take  care  to 
speak-the  truth,  both  in  prosperous  and  adverse  times. 

REVIEW  OF  FIFTH  LESSON. 

(§  55.)  What  is  the  peculiar  characteristic  of  I  and  r?  (?  50.)  ITow 
are  they  represented  in  combination  with  other  consonants  ?  (j}d7.) 
Describe  the  difference  between  p-l  and  pi,  p-r  and  pr.  (§  58.)  On 
which  side  of  straight  stems  is  the  r-hook  written?  (i/59.)  On 
whieh  side  of  the  curved  stems?  (^GO.)  How  are  duplicate  forms 
for  thr,  light  and  heavy,  obtained  ?  What  is  the  rule  for  their  use? 
(^CI.)  How  is  the  c-hook  represented  on  in  and  n?  (^GS.")  How 
is  the  «-cirele  written  so  as  to  precede  the  r-hook  on  straight 
stems?  (^  66.)  How  on  the  curved  strokes?  (?64.)  If  a  vowel 
precede  these  triple  stems,  what  is  the  order  of  reading?  (if  67. )  In 
what  eases  must  the  hook  as  well  as  the  circle  be  distinctly  formed? 
(i^TO.)  Explain  the  special  method  of  writing  the  dot  vowels  to 
these  triple  consonants.     The  dash  vowels,  and   diphthongs. 


OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 


63 


i,H; 


Hnn. 


ILLUSTRATION  OF  THE  /^HOOK. 


TABLE  OF  THE  Z-HOOK. 

\  pi  \  bl    r  tl    r  (11    /^  ch-l  y  jl   ^—  kl   ,^_  gl     y  rl 

V.fl    '^^vl    Ctli-1    Ctli-^    J^sh-l  ^zh-l    r--  ml    c^  nl 

72.  If  the  Left  hand  be  held  up,  and  the  fore-finger  bent 
as  in  the  cut,  the  outline  |  tl  will  be  seen ;  and,"  by  turn- 
ing the  hand  round  to  the  four  different  positions,  all  the 
straight  doul)le  consonants  of  the  PI  series,  and  most  of  the 
curved  ones,  will  be  indicated.  The  Z-hook  is  shown  by 
the  Left  hand. 

73.  On  all  the  curved  signs  that  take  the  l-hodk,  it  is 
written  on  the  concave,  or  inner  side ;  but,  in  order  to 
distinguish  it  from  the  7-h()ok,  it  is  wxitten-twice  as  large. 
Sh-l  is  generally  written  upward,  as  in   V^  V  official. 

74.  The  stems  for  s  and  z,  as  with  the  r-hook,  do  not 
take  the  ^hook,  /^  and  /"  Ijeing  preferal)le  to  ^  and  ^, 
as  in  '^fS  mvstclr,  or  muzzle.  Neither  does  the  stroke 
(^  I  take  the  /-hook.  Nyl  '^^   for  inghj,  is  occasionally  used. 


V_ 


64  AM  ERICA  N    MANUAL 


75.  The  stroke  and  hook  being  considered  as  one  sign,  are 
vocalized  generally  in  a  very  simple  manner.  If  a  vowel 
2>reccde  the  double  consonant  sound,  it  is  written  before  the 
sign;  thus:  \  able,\_evil,  \^  awful,  v|  idle,  t_^  eagle; 
if  a  vowel  follow  it  must  be  placed  after;  thus:  V  plc^J, 
■--o  close;  or  a  vowel  may  be  written  both  before  and  after 
the  consonant  sign;  thus:  \.  ably,     \  aj^ply,         \c  "''7'*^> 

•e         ajlict. 

TUE  SPL  SERIES  OF  COXSOXAXTS. 

76.  The  s-circle  is  prefixed  to  the  ^-hook,  on  both  straight 
and  curved  strokes,  in  the  siiuie  maniier  that  it  is  prefixed 
to  the  r-hook  on  the  curved  signs,  that  is,  by  writing  both 
the  circle  and  the  hook  distinctly;  thus: 


\   s-pl 

f^tl 

/^s-chl 

e_  s-kl 

\s-bl 

Ps^l 

/^s-jl 

c^-  s-gl 

^s-fl 

^s-thl 

^  .^shl 

(5^  s-ml 

($^s-vl 

(^s-thl 

^s-zhl 

•^s-nl 

77.  The  vocalizing  of  these  triple  consonants  is  the  same 
as  that  of  the  spr  series;  thus:  p  saddle,  3\v  ^^'PP^l/> 
G — ;  sickly,    \^  civil,-^-^-^-^-^  cvclaim,    jJ^     eternal. 

78.  The  special  scheme  of  vocalization  is  also  applied  to 
the    ^-hook;    thus:  >-*     valuable,  \     till,   (^ — 'legal    p-^ 
tolerable,  C  falsify,  c+_'-^_^|  culminate.        _^ 

Z,-IIOOK  WORD-SIGNS. 

\^  people,  \  tell,  until,  f  deliver <= cull,'  cool,'  /^children, 

V^follow,'  full,2     V^  value,    c_^    only. 


J 


OF   PHONOGRAPHY.  05 


Keadlng  Exercise  VII. 


\. 


V       e_       ._      \        c_l       V^      ^ 


%,*  %      ■%      ^     1~^     "^"^      \D      No    c_0 

^  i  c^    V^  Va  ■         Q>  ci^.    ^ 

.\  K^  K   ■?   f  ^   ^  /"  ^    ^ 

\  \         \      No-     ^    ^        V  ^^'  vl    ^ 


Writing  Exercise  XI. 

Plea,    ply,    plow,  blue,    glee,    bible,'    title,    couple,  regal, 
penal,  tunnel,  fickle,    vocal ;  biases,  classes,  oblige,  reclaim, 
disclaim,     discloscfs,     radical,     clerical,     journal,      removal,>v 
inflame,  4[1jushel,      i'hovely'   marshal,     partial,    iml\s.\,  jdM^ 
ruffle,  rely,  relieve,  relapse;   lovingly,  jokingly,  strongly. 
•  Falsity,      volume,     fulminate,      philosophical,      calamity, 
collect,   college,  voluminous,  colonize,  vulgar. 

Sujiply,    suppleness,     saddle,    satchel,     possible,     feasible, 
peaceful,  deceitful,  advisable,  excusal)le. 


66 


AMEKK'AN    MANUAL 


I       A       O 


Reading  Exercise  VIII. 

^  ^  X  ^  ^  _.  y  ^  >  ,  ,  --A^  o  .-^^ 


T   ^x 


N       V) 


^- 


<—0      o       '       o  1  X 


^ 


OF   PHONOGRAPHY.  G7 


WfilTlNti   EXEBCISE  XII. 

To  grow  angry  at  trifles  is  miserable  folly,  an<l  a  disgrace. 

]Most  jieople  i»refor  reasonable  cbeerfulness  to  senseless  mirth. 

All  Christian  graees  and  virtues  must  be  fed  by  personal 
charity.  ^'^ 

Nothing  can  supply  tiie  place  of  valuable  ixxiks  in  a  family 
of  children. 

There  is  nothing  as  soon  overthrows  a  .strong  head  as 
strong^liquor.—  '       • 

The  Bil)le  is  a  most  noble  old  IxMik,  full  of  both  philo.^phic 
and  moral  truths.  """^ 

Female  beauties  are  as  likely  ty  be  fickle  in  their  faces 
as  in  their  fancies.  *v 

A  graceful  presence  l)^sp^•;ll^.^  lasur  fmm  the  most  extreme 
stickler  for  i)ropriety. 

Peaceful  times  are  the  most  prosperous  and  desirable 
to  all   sensible  people. 

Poverty  may  suifer  for  many  things,  but  avarice  desires 
and  grasps  at   everything. 

The  principal  glory  of  every  civilized  i>eoplc  arises  from 
the  triumphs  of  its  authors. 

Children  are  like  travelers  in  a  strange  place,  and  should 
receive  every  necessary  care. 


REVIEW  OF  THE  SIXTH  LESSON. 

(?72.)  On  which  side  of  the  straight  strokes  is~the /-hook?  (?73.) 
How  is  it  represented  on  the  curved  signs?  (ii~4.)  What  signs  do 
not  take  the /-hook?  C<;75.  >  How  are  these  double-eonsdnants  voeal- 
izedT~('i;r6. )  How  is  the  «-circ!e  prefixed  to  the  /-hook?  (,  j.78. )  Ex- 
plain the  special  mode  of  vocalizing  these  double  consonants,  when  a 
vowel  is  to  be  read  between  the  stroke  and  the  hook.  ("',79.)  What 
are  the  straight  stroke  word-signs  of  the  /-hook  series?  What  are  the 
curved  word-signs? 


v.. 


68  AMERICAJj    MAXLAL 


mtm. 


TERJtllNAL  HOOKS  FOR  iV;  F  AND  V. 

80.  Since  the  hooked  strokes,  although  representing  two 
elementary  sounds,  are  written  with  nearly  the  Siime  facility 
as  the  simple  strokes,  the  hooking  principle  is  applied  to  the 
termination  of  consonant  stems  as  well  as  to  the  beginning. 
The  most  useful  purix)ses  which  the  two  small  terminal  hooks 
can  subserve,  are  to  rejircsent  the  frequent  sounds  of 
n,  /  and  v, 

TABLE  OF  THE  JV-HOOK. 

\pn  \  bn  ,j  tn  J  dn  ^y^  ch-u  ^  jn  ~— =■  kn  — a  gn 
V^fn  V^  vn  (^  th-n  (^  tli-n  J  sn  J  zn  ^  sh-n  ^  zh-n 
/^  In  ^  rn     /' rn   ^-"^  mn"^— ^  nn  ^  yn  ^  wn    ^/     hn 

81.  On  the  straight  strokes  the  «-liook  is  written  on  tlie  left- 
hand  side  of  the  vertical  and  inclined,  and  on  tlie  under  side 
of  the  horizontal  strokes,  embracing  the  upstroke  r  and  h. 
On.  the  curved  strokes  it  is  written  on  the  inner  or  concave 
side,  as  shown  in  the  above  table. 

82.  Stems  with  tlie  n-hook  are  vocalized  as  the  simjile 
strokes,  not  requiring  the  peculiar  methods  of  the  r-liook  and 
Wiook;  thus:  \*   /jam- J  dawn,\^ fine, /\  'run,  /''\,rajnne, 

^i^-^^  remain,  ^C/^'  foreign. 


OF   PHONOUKAPHY.  69 


8b.  Third-place  vowel  signs  are  written  outside  of  the 
hook:   thus:    '     -i  keen,    (    thin,    ^~^    moon. 

84.  Strokes  having  an  initial  circle,  loop,  or  hook  of  any 
kind,  may   also   have  a   final   hook ;  as :  ^sV  sj^ine,  K    jjlu^h 

\^sprciin,  \^  soften,  \^^f'ffcn,  a'     stolen. 

85.  If  no  djstiiK't  vowel  sound  is  heard  between  the  sound 
of  the  stroke  and  the  hook,  no  vowel  sign  is  written  ;  as  in 

X^  open,  K^  often,  y'_,  shaken,  --s^/    region. 
8G.  This  hook  is  often  written  in  the  middle,  as  well  as  at 

the    end    of  wonlr,    as    1     = — >  econo)nij,  r\ .     oraanir, 

\  abandon. 
J- 

THE  .V-IIOOK  FOLLOWED    BY    ^S",  .Sr,  STJi. 

87.  When  n  is  the  last  consonant  in  a  word,  followed 
by  a  vowel,  the  stroke  must  be  written;  tlius,  compare 
-""^  woo??,  ^'~\L<  money,  ^  bone,'*^*C._^^^  ^ony,  \^fim,  *v^^  ,^ 
funny,    </v,    china. 

88.  When  the  sound  of  s  follows  n  Avithout  an  intervening 
vowel,  it  m.ay  be  represented,  on  straight  stems,  by  turning 
the  ?i-hook  into  a  circle,  since  the  simple  s-circle  is  written 
only  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  stem;  thus:  Tc/me,  J  dines; 
(/"^  join,  ^-^  joins;  /^  run,  /\  rvns.  Tlie  double  circle  may 
be  written  in  the  same  way;  as  -(/o?if,  ^-dunces;  ^y^' chance, 
(y^  chances. 

80.  The  st  and  str  loops  may  be  added  to  the  ?i-hook  in  the 
same  manner  as  the  circle  s;  thus:  \.  ^bounced,  ^X' chanced, 
\    spinster. 

00.  When  tlic  sound  of  .s  follows  the  n-hook  on  a  curved 
stem,  however,  the  circle  must  be  formed  in  addition  to  the 
hook,  since  the  simple  s-circle  is  written  in  that  ix)sition; 
thus:  V^  fine,  \^  fines;  ^  ocean,  ^'  oceans;  {<'  loan^ 
(Sloans;    /"    ^  renown,  /^>~^ — ^   renonncc. 


70 


AMERICAN    MANUAL 


91.  The  loops  st  and  str  cannot  be  added  to  the  7J-hook 
on  curved  strokes;  and  therefore  in  such  combinations  the 
stroke  n  must  be  written ;  as  V^^  finest,   /^^~^ — ^  renounced. 

92,   jyr-HOOK  WORD-SIGNS. 

\  upon      \    been      J  done        ^y  general-ly^      — =  again 

V^  phonography    (  than,'  then    (^  alone  "^  man  ^-^  men 

^opinion*  ^  learn 

Eeadixg  Exercise  IX. 

y     V     \      J-     J.     J.     y^  "^    -r>  /^ 
k.   ^J    ^     7    ^v^   ^'  X^    ^    ^* 

V 


y 


^ 

OF  PHOXOGRAPHY.  71 


Writing  Exercise  XIIL 

Pain,  boon,  tone,  dawn,  chain,  John,  coin,  gnn,  gone, 
fine,  vain,  tlien,  shone,  ocean,  loan,  line,  main,  mean,  mine, 
known,  wine;  open,  ripen,  ribbon,  redden,  region,  shaken, 
organ,  orphan,  heaven,  heathen,  fallen,  turn,  mourn; 
remain,  regain,  abstain,  swain,  swoon. 

Pen,  penny;  pun,  puny;  down,  downy;  Jane,  Jennie; 
cane,  canal;  fan,  Fanny;  vine,  vinegar;  shine,  shiny;  line, 
lion;  rain,  rainy;  main,  many;  pan,  pannel;  tun,  tunnel; 
chain,  channel;  fine,  final;  thin,  thinly;  spine,  spinal; 
train,  eternal;  sprain,  sprinkle ;  swine,  swinny;  hone,  honey. 

Pains,  beans,  towns,  chains,  gains,  reins,  burns,  hence, 
residence,  expense,  explains,  inclines;  Germans,  offence, 
refines,  heavens,  shuns,  leans,  loans,  means,  remains, 
canons,  violence. 

Every  man's  main  chance  is  to  earn  his  money  by  due 
diligence. 

A  mean  man's  manners  are  generally  as  offensive  as  his 
meannesses. 

A  man  has  no  more  right  to  say  Sn  uncivil  thing  to 
me  than  to  knock  me  down. 

A  man's  opinions  are  often  the  growth  of  ignorance 
and  chance  remark. 

Muscular  strength  is  often  taken  for  true  courage,  by  nine 
out  of  ten  among  men. 

•   Tlie  fallacy  of  this  opinion   has  been   shown  by  general 
practice,  for  prudence  is  also  necessary. 

A  truly  Christian  man  looks  down  like  an  eternal  .sun 
upon  the  autumn  of  his  existence. 

A  man's  religion  generally  inclines  his  soul  to  turn  to 
heaven  for  guidance. 

Physical  pain  is  less  grievous  to  be  borne  than  an  offence 
agaiu.st  the  soul. 


72  AMERICAN   MANUAI, 


TABLE    OF    THE    /'   AXD     V   HOOK. 

\^  pf  or  pv  ^  t£  tv  /^   ch-f  cii-v         =  kf  kv 

N^  bf  bv  [  (If  dv  /  jf  jv  — 5gf  gv 

^  rf  rv  ^   hf  hv 

93.  The  hook  for/  and  v  is  the  same,  since  their  sounds  are 
so  nearly  alike  that  whichever  is  pronounced  will  suggest  the 
rigiit  word.  It  is  used  on  the  straight  strokes  only,  and  on 
the  side  opposite  to  that  of  the  7«-hook,  namely:  on  the 
right-hand  side  of  jjerjiendicular  and  inclined  strokes,  and  on 
the  upi)er  side  of  horizontals,  including  r  and  h. 

94.  This  hook  is  not  written  on  the  curved  strokes,  because 
the  n-hook  occupies  the  concave  side  of  the  curves,  and  an- 
other hook  cannot  be  readily  or  gracefully  formed  on  the 
convex  side.* 

95.  Strokes  having  this /and  I'-hook  are  vocalized  and  read 
simply,    as  those  taking  the   «-hook;    \^.bcef,    ^ — =  cmiyh, 

\y^  prove,    1v    strife,    r^    grave,    ,-v^    curve,    I  ^^   dejeme, 
■r^  reverse. 

96.  When  /  or  v  is  the  last  consonant  in  a  word,  and 
followed  by  a  vowel,  the  full  stroke  must  be  written ;  thus, 
compare  |-^  cough,  .""A^  foffee;  err"  ffrare,  "^"^"V^  grary, 
A  rough,   y\^  riven;  j;  denf,  (^  defij,  Nr-\^   varg. 

97.  The  circle  s  or  z  may  be  added  to  this  hook,  by 
turning  a  distinct  circle  inside  the   hook;  thus  j — ®  coughs, 

j|j'  drives,   Ji  raves. 

9S.  /'   AND   1'  HOOK  WORD-SICNS. 
\^  above       j    differ     /'^  whichever    ^  Jehovah    — ^  gave 

*  Mr.  Munson's  scheme,  and  that  of  Mrs.  E.  B.  Bnrns,  admit  of  the 
use,  to  R  liiiiitod  extent,  of  a  long  sleniler  hook  on  the  curved 
strokes,  for  y*  and  try  but  it  cannot  be  comuiendod,  since  it  t«nds  to 
ambiguity. 


OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 


73 


Eeadixg  Exercise  X. 

\q   "^^  %    ^  ^   ^ 


Writixg  Exercise  XIV. 

Puff,  deaf,  gave,  rough,  roof,  scoff,  serve,  curve,  drove, 
grief,  cleave,  grave;  cliffs,  gloves,  groves;  bereave,  preserve, 
provoke,  deserve,  refer,  reference,  retrieve;  devoid,  divide, 
provide,  bravery;  observes,  reproves,    engraves,  derives. 

(Jrief  drove  the   |)oor  man  roughly  to  his  early  grave. 

They  who  deserve  reproof  strive  to  bear    it  bravely. 

It  behooves  the  brave  man  to  preserve  his  honor  and 
maintain  his  glory. 

The  man's  chief  province,  I  discover,  is  to  puff  bravery 

and  provoke  strife. 

IIEVIEW  OF  LESSON  SEVENTH. 

(^81.)  On  which  sido  of  the  straight  strokes  is  the  n-hook  written? 
IIow  written  on  the  curves?  (;<S7.  \  Wlien  is  it  necessary  to  write 
the  full  stroke  »  ?  (JjHS.  )  Mow  in»y  the  x-circle  be  added,  on  straif?ht 
strokes,  to  Ihe/i-hoi.k?  ^  i;90.  )  Ililw  on  the  curved  strokes  ?  (^89.) 
How  may  tlie  «f  and  «//•  ioojis  be  added?  (i;92. )  What  are  the 
H-hook  word-signs?  {'',%\.\  On  what  strokes,  and  which  side,  is  the 
/-(■  hook  written?  (i^'jli.  i  Wiien  is  it  necessary  to  write  the  full 
strokes  /"and  r?  (i;97.  )  How  may  the  circle  *  or  z  be  added  to  this 
hook?     (^98.)  "What  are  the/  and   r-liook  word-signs  ? 


74  AMERICAN   3IAXUAL 


Jit^sm. 


LAKGE  TERMINAL  HOOKS  FOR  SEN,  TR   AND  THR. 

99.  In  the  earlier  editions  of  Phonography  only  one  size 
of  hooks,  initial  and  final,  was  employed.  But,  in  the  pro- 
cess of  exjjerinient  and  improvement,  it  was  satisfactorily 
established  tliat  a  larger  as  well  as  a  small  hook  could  lie 
easily  written,  and  readily  distinguished  one  from  the  other. 
As  the  best  use  that  could  be  made  of  one  of  the  large 
terminal  hooks,  it  was  appropriated  to  the  representation 
of  the  frequently  recurring  .syllables,  -cian,  -tian,  -sion,  -Cum ; 
thus:  \j  passion,  LD  occasion,  c-^  Grecian,  "^  notion, 
^  ration,   ^-^  sam-tion. 

100.  This  hook  is  called  the  shun  hook,  becau.se  in  ordinary 
speech  the  syllal^les  thus  uniformly  represented  are  so  pro- 
nounced ;  but  in  careful  reading  and  speaking  the  short 
sounds  of  a.  and  o  should  be  given  wherever  these  letters 
occur.  Although  this  representation  is  not  entirely  phonetic, 
inasmuch  as  there  are  three  elementary  sounds  to  the  one 
sign,  yet  it  is  near  enough  so  for  a  contracted  style  of  writ- 
ing. Of  course  this  class  of  words  could  be  written  out 
in  full,  with  the  sh  and  7j-strokes,  or  with  the  sh  stroke  and 
/i-hook,  but  for  the  sake  of  simple,  graceful  forms,  and 
speed  in    making  them,  the  hook   is  preferable. 


OF    PHONOGRAPHY.  75 


TABLE  OF  THE  SHN-EOOK. 


\j  p-shn 

L  t-shn 

/     ch-shn 

~-)  k-shn 

\,  b-shn 

L  d-shn 

I  j-shn 

—D  g-shn 

Vo  ^-^"^ 

Q   th-shn 

]   s-shn 

/  sh-shn 

V    ^  v-shn 

(^  th-shn 

(J  z-shn 

^  zh-shn 

^ 

^''  r-shn 

^^  ^   1-shn 

"^  w-shn 

r  J  m-shn 

v_:5  n-shn 

^^  ng-shn 

iJ^  h-shn 

101.  This  shn-hodk,  it  will -be  seen,  is  written  on  the  same 
side  of  straight  strokes  as  the.  /-t>-hook,  and  on  the  curved 
strokes  the  same  side  as  the  «-liook,  but  about  twice  as 
large  in  eacji  case. 

102.  The  stroke  ^  does  not  require  the  use  of  the  shn- 
hook,  for  the  writing  of  English  words,  and  on  some  of 
the  others  it  is  rarely  if  ever  used. 

103.  Stems  taking  the  s/(H-hook  are  vocalized  simply  as 
those    having    the    «-hook;    thus:    Vt      jjotion^  I,   addition, 

JL  sedition,  ^-^  section,  J :>  discussion,  '^~:i  omission,  v     fashion, 

i^  vision,  ^-^  junction. 

104.  When  the  sounds  of  sh  and  n  final  arc  the  only  con- 
sonants in  a  word,  tlie  form  ^  must  be  used  as  \J  ocean; 
and  if  an  accented  vowel  come  between  the  sh  and  n,  the 
same  form  must  be  used ;  as  ^^~^  machine. 

105.  This  hook  may  also  be  lised  advantageously  in  the 
middle  of  many  words;  as  |  ■<^'  dictionanj,  V— >>^'  w*'^- 
sionary,  ^"•^-f\<^' functionary. 

lOG.  The  circle  s  may  be  added  to  form  tlm  ^ilural  of  words 
ending  in  -sion,  -tion,  by  writing  it  inside  of  the  hook;  thus: 

■jq    additions,     J ^discussions,  V-^  adniimojis. 

107.  The  sA»-hook  may  also  be  written  to  a  stem  having  a 
final  s-circle,  an  M.?-circle,  or  an  s/r-loop;  as  ^— i?  accession, 
I,   decision,     Y  cessatio»,'\'  compensation,     "C^  illustration. 


— ^ 

76  AMERICAN  MANUAL 


The   s-circle   may   be   added   to   this  form  of  the   hook ;  as 
\fj  positions ,  V^^    physicians. 

The  vocalization  of  this  hook  is  seldom  necessary,  as  the 
preceding  syllables  generally  indicate  what  the  word  is ;  but 
the  second-place  vowels  a  and  e  may  be  written  to  the  middle 
of  the  hook,  and  the  third-place,  i,  to  the  end,  as  shown  above. 

108,    SHN-llQOK    WORD-SIGNS. 

\j  objection,      \)  subjection,     I     temptation,    —3)  occasion, 

1^^  revolution/  ^~^  motion,    ^-^  nation. 

Reading  Exkkcisje  XI. 

X,   r-  1.    g  ^    l^-  J-   ^   -,-^-  (/ 

•  •  •  • 


u 


"r     '\       e*   ^-^     ^—'-^    v^     -^-^    r;^    cLiAr 

Writing  Exercise  XV. 

Passion,  potion,  auction,  option,  rotation,  oppression, 
repression,  obligation,  instigation,  ambition,  abrogation, 
duration,  adhesion ;  selections,  delegations,  exhibitions, 
eruptions. 

Fusion,  provision,  invasion,  revision,  division,  session, 
collision,  abolition,  adulation,  inflation;  emotions,  orations, 
ammunition,  nominations. 


-^ 


/     /   -^ 

ONOGRAPHY.  I^)  ^7 


Writing  Exercise    XV — Concluded. 

Petitioner,  occasional,  additional,  rational,  visionary, 
national,  provisional. 

Causation,  decision,  opposition,  supposition,  propositions, 
accusations,  precision,  dispensation,  physicians,  musician, 
sensation,  molestation,  illustrations. 

TABLE    OF    THE  Tli    AND     THR    HOOK. 

\  p-tr                   J  t-tr  ^y  ch-tr                   ~^  k-tr 

\^  b-tr                   J  d-tr  ^/  j-tr                     —5  g-tr 

/'^r-tr  /^  h-tr 

109.  This  hook  is  written  on  the  straight  strokes  only, 
since  the  curves  can  take  but  one  large  hook,  and  that  is 
used  for  the  sArt-hook.  It  occupies  the  n-hook  side,  and  is 
written  the  same  size  as  the  «/(?t-hook. 

110.  It  is  generally  used  to  represent  the  syllables  -tcr,  -tor, 
-thrr,  and  sometimes  -turc;  thus:  \)  ^w^^tr,  -factor, 
J^  tighter,  •  ■>  (jathcr,  |  '  structure.  In  the  latter  word 
and  others  of  its  class,  only,  is  the  vocalization  j)eculiar, 
as  in  §70. 

111.  The  8-circle  may  be  added,  to  form  the  plural  or  pos- 
sessive case  of  words;    as:      ^    plotters.  '•     ^    aathers,     X 
pictures,  X    writers.     The  n-hook  may  occasionally  fx)  writ- 
ten inside  of  this  large  liook,  for  the  addition  of  the  word 
tlian;  as    j'  tighter-than,  /^  rather-than. 

112.  This  hook  is  sometimes  used  in  the  middle  of  Avords 
advantageouslv;   as:    J         dnvg}dcr-i)i-laiv,     ^         brother-in- 

law,  ^      subterfuge,       ',/2     hitherto.  ' 

llB.'^hese  syllables  -ter,  -for,  -thcr,  -dcr.  are  represented 
on    the  curves  by   simply   doubling   their    length,  which   is 


78 


AMERICAN   MANUAL 


equivalent  to  straightening  out  the  large  hook,  so  that  it  may 
be  distinguished  from  the  shn;  thus:    'i^    father,   f*     latrr, 
^ — ^  neater,     'Cy^"^  falter,  /^^^ '  "motherly,    V-y-^  entirely, 
'^— k_^  signature. 

114.  Doubling  the  curves  -•^^^  mp,  mb,  and  s-/'  ng,  is 
not  needed  for  the  addition  of  /;•,  thr ;  therefore  these  signs 
made  double-length  are  utilized  for  tlie  addition  of  -er, 
-ger,  Oi"  -ker ;   as    U — v  damper,  ^    ^    limber,    < — "   anger, 

^ — ^    linger,     ^V.__^  banker. 

115.  The  s-circle  may  be  added  to  these  double-strokes;  as 
V P  anoiheis;   also,  the  «-hook,  for   the   addition  of    the 

words  one  and  than;  as    ^ — ?  another-one,   f      lighter-than. 

IIG.    TR    AND    THR   WOPD-SIGNS. 
V        father^    /''     n    matter^    .--^    mother^     "^^ — ^'  another^ 

V y  neither^  f^      latter'     ^        further  9  shorter' 

^•^..^  longer'  younger^       ~N   order  \   wider'  weather'^ 

Reading  Exercise  XL 
\     ^  •  y     J-    J-  c/-    ^    ^     I      ^    <^ 


j^  ^^ 


OF  PHONCXJRAPHY. 


79 


Writing  Exercise  XVI. 

Pother,  batter,  debtor,  sputter,  splatter,  victor,  heater; 
stutters,  brothers,  gutters,  doctors;  debater,  dissipator, 
operator,  curator,  desecrator,  demonstrator,  reflector. 

Feature,  voter,  softer,  sifter,  flatter,  flutter ;  easterly, 
oysters,  shorter,  lighter,  loiter,  slaughter,  orators,  weather, 
water,  murder,  northern,  senat«5rs,  smother,  innovator, 
elevator,  provider,  dissenter,  originitor;  timber,  limber, 
slumber,  November,  hanker,  hunker. 


^  ^ 


Reading  Exercise  XIIL 


v. 


80  AMEKICAN   MANUAL 


Writing  Exercise  XVII. 

Passion  and  oppression  drive  men  to  revolution. 

Ambition  is-an  emotion  liable  to  long  duration. 

Violations  of-moral  obligations  deserve  disapprobation. 

In-this  nation  of  freemen  every  voter  may-be  a  senator. 

Observation  and  discrimination  insure-the  best  legislation. 

Neither  father  nor  mother  can  supply-the  place  of  another. 

The  careless  debtor  is  likely  to-become  a  dissipator  and 
to-slumber  in-the  gutter. 

It-is  entirely  a  matter  of  choice  whether  oysters  are  eaten 
in  November  or  December. 

The  pen  of  the  ready  writer  is  a  scejiter  of  power 
which  knows  no  limitation. 

Man's  subjection  to-temptation  gives  occasion,  first,  for  dis- 
sipation, and- then  for  reformation. 

The  calculation  of  the  diameter  of  the  earth  is  based  on  the 
discoveries  of  the  later  philosophers. 

Brothers  and  sisters  should  make  provision  for  each  other's 
information  and  progression  in  co-operation. 

REVIEW    OF    LESSON    EIGHTH, 

(|9^.)  What  syllables  are  represented  by  the  «A»i-hook?  (^101.) 
How  is  it  written?  (^104.)  In  what  classes  of  words  must  the  stroke 
sh  and  »i-hook  be  used,  and  not  the  «/iH-hook?  (^106.)  How  may  the 
«-circle  be  added  to  this  hook?  (^07.)  How  may  the  «^ii-hook  be 
added  to  a  stem  ending  with  a  circles?  (^108.)  What  are  the  shti- 
hook  word-signs?  (^109.)  How  is  the  tr  or  <//r-hook  written? 
(^111.)  Is  the  «-circle  added  to  this  hook?  (?113.)  Explain  the 
double-length  curved  strokes.  (iJll4. )  What  is  the  effect  of  doubling 
the  length  of  m;j  and  uc/"!  (?116.)  What  are  the  straight  tr  and  thr 
word-signs?    What  are  the  word-signs  of  the  double-length  curves? 


OF   rHONOGIlArHY.  81 


'f  inllj  Jfi$$mt. 


IRREGULAR  DIPHTHONGS— BRIEF  W,    Y   AND  K 

117.  The  fact  tliat  the  sounds  of  w  and  y  never  occur  in 
English  except  before  vowels,  and  thus  occur  so  frequently, 
induced  the  inventor  of  Phonography  to  provide  for  repre- 
senting the  combination  of  each  of  these  elements  with  each 
of  the  vowels,  by  single  signs.  In  doing  so,  he  selected  signs 
so  brief,  and  that  so  readily  unite  with  other  signs,  that,  like 
the  circle  s,  they  are  more  frequently  used  than  the  regular 
stroke  signs. 

118.  The  sign  for  the  -io-series  is  obtained  by  dividing  a 
small  circle  perpendicularly,  thus:  cjj  ;  taking  the  first,  or 
left-hand  half  of  the  circle,  to  represent  the  union  of  w  with 
the  first,  or  dot  series  of  vowels;  and,  like  them,  it  is'made 
heavy  for  the  long,  or  full  sounds,  thus:  I  weed,  V  wave; 
and  light  for  the  short,  as:    cl  tvei,  ^/  witch. 

119.  The  second  half  of  the  circle  represents  the  union  of 
w  with  the  second,  or  dash  series  of  vowels,  heavy  and  light; 
as    ? —  walk,    ^/^\  warp,  JJ  wash* 

'■■■ThcHc  diphthongal  signs  were  at  first,  and  until  recently,  written 
separately  from  the  strokes,  in  the  first,  second,  and  third  places, 
the  same  as  the  simple  vowels;  but  for  the  sake  of  greater  legibility 
when  the  vowels  are  omitted,  in  rji^id  writing,  it  is  found  better  to 
rciiresent  tnc  w  element  in  nearly  all  words  in  which  it  occurs. 


82  AMERICAN    MANUAL 


120,  TABLE    OF    THE     ir-SERIES. 
THE    DOT    GROUP.  THE    DASH   GROUP. 

Long.  Short.  Long.  Short. 

*|  wau  'I  \vo 


wah  ^1   wS 

wa  c|   w6 

we  ,  I  wi 


wo  >|  wu 

woo  J  woo 


121.  These  signs  should  be  written  as  small  as  they  well 
can  be  and  preserve  distinct  semi-circles;  and  they  must 
always  he  written  vertically,  and  not  change  with  the  differ- 
ent positions  of  the  consonants. 

122.  Practically,  of  late  years,  only  the  first-place  signs 
of  this  tf-series  are  used  to  any  extent,  and  they  are  cm- 
ployed  to  represent  the  simple  power  of  u\  leaving  the  vowel 
to  be  understood,  or  inserted.  When  thus  used,  either  half 
of  the  circle  may  be  written,  according  to  convenience  in 
joining,  and  the  light  sign  should  be  employed ;  but  when 
one  sign  is  as  readily  joined  to  the  following  .<troke  as  the 
other,  that  one  should  be  used  which  indicates  the  group  to 
which    the  vowel  belongs  that  is  heard  in  the  syllable  ;  thus: 

.J  wed,  ~\  ivod,  .y  tcUh.  To  - —  k  and  /  r,  however, 
only  the  sign  of  the  dash-group  can  be  written,  hence  we 
write :  j — ?  week,  i— :  wiy,  as  well  as  ^^-L  yoke  and  -^  tear. 
On  \^  and  \^  also,  ■*  is  more  easily  written,  while  on 
/   and    /     *    is    more    readily    joined;     thus,   \^   weep, 

S^  web,  /  watch,    -^  wedge. 

THE   ir-HOOKS. 

123.  For  convenience  in  joining,  and  to  get  better  forms  for 
many  words,  w  is  also  represented  by  a  large  initial  hook  on 
I  and  upstroke  r,  thus:  f^  wl,  ^wr.  The  hook  is  read  first, 
then  the  vowel  and  following  stroke  to  which  it  is  prefixed ; 
as,  ^/^  wall,   C~^^  welfare,  ly^  wire,  -J,-^JyY     unworthy. 


OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 


83 


124.  There  is  a  large  class  of  words  which,  in  the  com- 
mon orthography,  contain  the  combination  qu,  which  in 
Phonography  are  equivalent  to  kw,  as  in  quake,  inquire; 
a  smaller  number,  containing  the  similar  combination  (ju, 
a.s  in  languid;  there  is  also  a  considerable  chiss  of  words  in 
which  t  and  d  are  followed  by  w,  as  in  twice,  tivist,  dwell. 
These  combinations  are  likewise  represented  by  a  large 
initial  hook,  but  unlike  the  w-hook  in  §123  where  the  hook 
is  read  first,  in  these  cases  the  stroke  is  read  first  and  then 
the     hook,    followed    by   the     vowel;     thus:     ^ — -.queer, 

"^ — ^    inquire,      y— :,      quiet,    ^"^^y    anguish,    j^v'  twice. 

125.  In  the  table  of  ;•  hooks,  §61,  ^""^  m  and  -^-^n  were 
directed  to  be  written  heavy,  with  a  small  initial  hook,  for 
the  combination  a — ^  mr,  ;_•  nr,  so  as  to  leave  the  same 
forms,  written  light,  for  another  pur{X)se.  That  purjwse  is 
the  representation  of  w  in  combination  with  m  and  n;  thus, 
cr~^  tern,  'z,_^  ten,  in  such  words  as  (r~^  leomen,  ^^^^^  when, 
Q-U  one;  and  more  especially  in  such  frequent  phrases  as, 
:r~^   we-may,  '^ — ^  when-fhere,  'z — ^    one-other. 

126.  The  circle  s  may  be  prefixed  to  tlie.se  uj-hooks ; 
as  Q^swear,  '^ — ^^  square,  q__/^  squall,  ^ — i  squad;  the 
circle  s  may  also  be  written  inside  of  the  brief  *^  and 
■•  when  it  cannot  be  otherwise  readily  expressed ; 
as:  ^    sweaty,      7   switch. 

THE     ir-WORD-SIGNS. 

127.  These  diphthongs  and  hooks  afford  a  number  of 
additional  word-signs.  Like  the  si  mpla_ vowel-signs,  most 
of  them  are  to  be  written  above,  or  on  the  lines  as  their 
positions  in    the    table   indicate. 

*  we  ,  with  •"    what  ,    would 

C     while,  well,   o^  were,  C —  equal-ly,  '^— ^when,   c:_^  one. 


84 


AMERICAN    MANUAL 


Reading  Exercisk  XIV. 


^  (^  f  .  J^  C:.  Of  c-  c!,  P^ 

"^--^^  (^"^^  "^^-^   ^~^   «^    c_L^    n*  ^\- 


Writtxq    Exercise    XVIII. 

\^Wrilemth  '  ]. — Wade,  wed,  wits,  witty,  weedy,  widow- 
er, wedges,  watches,  wishes,  washing,  waves,  wifely. 

[  Write  with  '  ]. — Webster,  weeping,  weekly,  weakness, 
wakeful,  wagon,  wickedly,  warriors,  wove,  woven. 

[  Write  with  W-HoohsJ] — Wail,  wealthy,  well  nigh,  well- 
being,  well-known,  willingness,  welcome,  wallow,  wolf,  Walter; 
weary,  weariness,  wary,  warehouse,  wiry,  wire-puller,  worry, 
worthless;    windows,  Winchester,  winter,  wonder,  women. 

Quack,  quick,  quickly,  query,  quest,  bequest,  inquest,  re- 
quest, quell,  quill,  equip,  equity,  quota,  quietly,  quenchless, 
relinquish,  extinguish;  tweak,  tweed,  tweesers,  twinge,  twist, 
betwixt,  twelve,  twenty;  squeeze,  square,  squalor,  squeamish, 
sequester,  sware,  swarthy. 

[  Write  stroke  TF.] — Waver,  warm,  warmth,  warmly  ;  sweep, 
swoop,  swim,  swamp,  swag,  swell,  swallow,  swelter,  woman. 


OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


TABLK    OF    TIIH 
THK   DOT    GROUP. 

Jjiing.  tSlinrt. 

^\   y«h  ^j  ya 

wj   yu  -|  y6 

..I  y^  J  y^ 


r-SERIES. 

THE   DASH  GROUP. 
Ijijiicj.  Short. 

"I  yau  "I  y6 

"I  y^  "I  y^ 

«'  yoo  ^1  yoo 


128.  To  obtain  characters  to  represent  the  y-series  of  irreg- 
iihir  diphthongs,  the  small  circle  is  divided  horizontally, 
thus:  -9"  ;  the  under  half,  representing  the  dot  group  of 
vowels,  is  made  heavy  for  the  long  sounds  and  light  for 
the  short;  as,  "^^  yarn.  The  upper  half  represents  the 
union  of  y  with  the  dash  group  of  vowels,  heavy  and  light ; 
as,    -^=-    yoke,   ^       york. 

129.  As  with  the  brief  it'-signs,  the  signs  of  this  y-series 
are  used  to  a  considerable  extent  to  represent  the  simple 
power  of  y,  leaving  the  vowel  to  be  understood  or  inserted; 
as  ^"^-^'  '  Yankee,  7  youth,  \^  young,  \^  utilize.  But 
it  is  also  used  frequently  as  a  vowel,  in  the  second  and 
third  places  as  well  as  the  first;  thus:  r'^^  lawyer, 
^^^    induce,  /.    genius,  ^^r,  ratio,   .1      idiot.* 

Reading  Exercise  XV. 


'*In  the  la.-^t  threo,  and  iiismy  similar  word.s,  where  the  i  precedes 
another  vowel,  it  is  not  prononneed  exactly  as  if,  but  it  comes  so  near 
it  that,  in  order  to  avoid  lifting;  the  pen  and  writing  two  signs,  they 
arc  written  as  above. 


86  AMERICAN    MANUAL 


MODE?  OF  WRITING  ASPIRATE  H. 

130.  The  aspirate  h  occurs  so  frequently  at  the  beginning 
of  words,  and  being  one  of  the  weakest  elements  in  the 
alphabet,  it  may  be  appropriately  represented  by  the  briefest 
sign ;  accordingly  the  stroke  ^'  h  is  reduced  to  the  tick  ^ 
alone,  wherever  it  can  be  readily  united  with  the  next  con- 
sonant, and  it  so  unites  with  —  /•,  —  9,  j  s,  )  z,  (^  I,  ~^  r, 
'—V  tn,  "^  w;  as  in   the  following  words:  ^—^  hook.  It—  hog, 

~)  huzzy  ^/^\  f^<^fp>  *\  -^  harm,  '^here,  ^  ho^t^,  ^  whine. 
It  may  be  also  written  to  brief  ■>  ;  as;  ^--  irhach, 
i—  whig,  (  whiff.  The  aspirate  is  indicated  before 
U  wl,  cy  fi^',  by  thickening  the  hook ;  as  */^  whale, 
^A^_^^  wherefore. 

131.  Occasionally,  in  the  advanced  style  of  writing,  in 
order  to  obtain  brief  forms  for  words  of  frequent  occurrence, 
in  which  brief  '  h  cannot  be  used,  both  signs  are  omitted;  as 
^'—^\  unhappy,  '\<idhere.  In  former  editions  of  Phonogra- 
phy, the  h  was  represented  in  this,  and  most  of  the  above 
classes  of  words,  by  writing  a  light  dot  before  the  vowel ; 
as  •'X.^^j;  happiness,  '\-^  abhor.  This  is  still  allowable, 
though  it  is  rarely  necessary. 

In  a  few  words,  mostly  proper  names,  a  downward  form  of 
the  stroke  h  is  convenient,  namely,  y' ;    as  in    \y^  behoove, 
/    Jehu,^'~^^^ Mahomet.  '\ 

THE    r-WORD-SIGNS. 


131.    The   following   are   the   Avord-signs  of  this  y-series: 
„  year,      \o      years,  '^  yet,  "  beyond,  ^  you. 


OF   THONOGKAPHY.  87 


Writixg  Exercise  XIX. 

I  Write  brief  ^  Y,  joined.'] — Yon,  yonder,  yawp,  yarn,  yawl, 
yankee,  yearly,  yearling,  yes,  yore,  yoke,  young,  youngster, 
youth,  youthful,  utility,  utensil,  Utopia,  usury,  usurious, 
usurp,  usurpation,  uhiquity. 

[  Write  stroke  F.] — Yawn,  yearn,  yell,  yelk,  yellow,  yellow- 
ish, yelp,  yeoman,  yeast,  yesterday,  unity,  unique.  Unitarian, 
universe,    universal,  Universalist. 

[  Write  "  or '-'  disjoined.] — Obvious,  envious,  previous,  serious, 
pinions,  onions,  minions,  palliation,  abbreviation,  alleviation. 

[  Write  brief  ^  H.] — Harm,  harmony,  harsh,  harshly,  horse, 
hearken,  harp;  hack,  hackman,  hackney,  hog,  hoggish,  hogs- 
head, hug,  hoax;  hail,  heal,  hull,  health,  hellish,  help,  helper, 
helm,  wholesale,  wholsome,  halter;  ham,  hamper,  home,  home- 
sick, homespun,  hominy,  humbug,  humiliation;  whale,  wheel, 
while;  wheelbarrow,  where,  whereby,  whereas,  whereupon, 
wherever,  wharf;  whine,  whip,  whipper,  whisper,  whiskers, 
whimsically. 


Eeading  Exercise  XVI. 


X 


v^Ly 


e«  AilKRICAN    MAMAL 

Writing  Exercise  XX. 

Yale  College  yearly  receives  many  young  pupils. 

We  would-be  willing  to-wear  the  honors  of  Webster. 

The  youth  of-our  Union  uniformly  assume  superiority. 
.The  utility  of-a  utensil  should-be  obvious  at  first  view. 

Healthful  exercise  harmonizes  the  various  functions  of 
body  and  brain. 

A  quiet  and  uniform  course  of  study  qualifies  any  one 
for  honest  industry. 

The  quack  quickly  equips  his  horse,  and  hastens  to 
humbi:g-tlie  homesick  woman. 

When  one  lives  beyond  his  years  he  loses  his  youthful 
ambition,  and-becomes  worthless. 

The  yelling  youngster  yearns  to  whack  the  horee  with 
his  whip,  while  he  twists  the  halter. 

It  is  horriTble  to  hoax-the  humble  i>eople  by-the  million, 
whereby  they-are  victimized  by-the  wholesale. 

The  weeping  widower  speaks  well  of-his  deceased  wife, 
while  on-the  outlook  for  some  winsome  widow. 

REVIEW  OF   THE     NIMH   LESSON. 

(?218.)  Describe  the  brief'method  of  writing  tr.  Which  half  of 
the  circle  represents  the  first  series  of  vowels?  (j>119. )  Which  the 
second  series?  (^121.).  How  are  these  signs  written  with  reference 
to  inclined  strokes?  (i;l22.)  When  joined  to  stroke  signs,  which  of  the 
series  is  used?     (^123.)  What  strokes  take  a  large  initial  hook  for  »r? 

^^124.)  How  are</M  and  fin  represented?  (^125.)  How  is  w  represented 
on  Hj  and  h?  (jJI27.)  What  are  the  tr-diphthong  word-signs?  What 
the  ?c-hook  word  signs?     (§128.)  How  is  brief  y  written?     Which  half 

;  of  the  circle  represents  the  first  series  of  vowels?     Which  the  second? 

j|||^0.  )  What  are  the  1/ word-signs?  ( <;i31.)  How  is  brief  A  written? 
To  what  strokes  may  it  be  written?  How  is  h  indicated  on  a  ic  hook? 
(i!l32. )  When  may  the  sign  for  h  be  omitted,  and  how  afterward  sup- 
plied? 


OF  PHONOGRAPHY.  89 


mi\ 


^0$$n«. 


HALVING  THE  STROKES  TO  ADD  T  OR  D. 

133.  In  consequence  of  the  frequent  recurrence  of  the 
sounds  t  and  d,  it  is  found  very  convenient,  and  sometimes 
necessary,  to  give  them  another  and  more  contracted  repre- 
sentation. In  science,  it  is  well  known,  the  more  a  sub- 
stance— a  poison,  or  steam,  for  example — is  concentrated,  the 
greater  is  its  power;  so,  in  order  to  get  a  duplication  of  the 
|K)wcr  of  the  consonants  t  and  (/  without  writing  them  at 
length,  the  single  strokes  i  and  | ,  by  being  compressed  into 
h»il/  (heir  lenyth,  are  made  to  represent  the  addition  of  a  <  or  d. 

134.  In  the  same  way  the  power  of  <  or  d  may  be  added 
to  all  other  consonants,  viz:  by  writing  them  half  their 
usual  length. 

135.  To  illustrate  this  principle,  suppose  the  word  faded  is 
to  l)e  written :  there  are  three  consonants  in  it,  all  downward 
strokes,  which  would  carry  the  last  f/ the  length  of  two  strokes 
below  the  line,  but  by  making  the  first  d  half  its  usual 
length  another  d  is  supposed  to  be  added,  and  the  Avord  is' 
thus  neatly  written:  ^  faded.  So  with  the  word  appetite, 
in  which,  following  the  down-stroke  p,  the  letter  <  must  be 
repeated ;  by  writing  the  first  one  half  its  usual  length 
another  t  is  indicated,  and  the  word  is  thus  briefly  written: 
\   appetite. 


'    90  AMERICAX    MANUAL 


136.  This  principle  of  contraction  is  further  illustrated  by 
comparing  the  following  words:  \~__  talk,  [2.  talked; 
/^\  rap,  ^\  rapped;  f^\^lii-e,  f^  lived;  y^  deal, 
\^  dealt;   |^_^  deem,   I.  deemed. 

137.  As  a  general  thing,  resulting  from  the  necessary  ac- 
tion of  the  vocal  organs  in  producing  the  successive  sounds 
in  words,  the  light  strokes,  when  halved,  are  followed  by  the 
light  sound,  /;  as  \  pat,  ^  Jov<jht,  ~  caught,  j^  delhjht; 
and  the  heavy  strokes,  Avhen  written  half-length,  are  followed 
by  the  heavy  sound,  d;  as  y^  robbed,  /~^  ragged, 
''~\.     moved. 

138.  But  occasionally  the  light  sound,  t,  will  follow  a  heavy 
stroke,  and  also  the  heavy  sound,  d,  follow  a  light  stroke ;  as 
in  /\^  rebut,  ^"-^J  invite;  1/  deride,  ,^-Jf''  melted, 
/\.  redeemed,  /\i  retired.  Generally  the  sense  of  the 
preceding  words  will  indicate  what  any  word  of  this  class 
should  be,  even  without  vocalizing. 

139.  The  halving  principle  is  applied  to  strokes  having 
initial  and  final  circles,  hooks  and  loops;  or,  rather,  circles, 
hooks  and  loops  are  written  on  half  length  strokes,  the  same 
as  on  full  length  strokes;  thus:  ^  sjiite,  v  pets,  \*  bleed, 
^  blind,  ^*  straight,  '^'  strained,  i  settled,  ^  secret~\  stopped, 
\^  puffed,     ^  stationed,     '^    battered,    ^    freight,  ~^   soft, 

,^    stuffed,'^  stored,  0--  stemmed,   ^  motioned, f\^  outward, 
/^^^  ruined. 

140.  The  rule  of  reading  the  added  t  or  d,  it  will  be  ob- 
served by  the  above  examples,  is  to  give  the  added  power 
immediately  after  the  half-length,  or  after  its  final  hook;  but 
when  a  final  .^-circle  or  st-\oo\i  is  written  to  a  half-lengtli 
stroke,  the   t   or   d  is   read   before  the  circle  or   loop ;  thus, 

•~  cat,     -^   cats,     not    cast,    Avhich    is    written    -^-^   cast; 
^   amid,  '-■^  amidst. 


OF  I'HONOGKAriiy.  91 


141.  With  the  foregoing  explanations,  the  order  of  reading 
voealized  half-lengths  will  be  simple,  since  it  i.i  praetieally 
the  same  as  with  the  fnll  strokes. 

142.  Half-length  strokes  may  l)e  employed  in  the  beginning 
or   middle  of  words,  as  well  as  finally :  thus:     •C^.—^hoitoin, 

^^   brtwcen,     ^~\    editor,     y^    /i(/.ipitablr,    '^     crcditailc; 
V      baffled,  ^^^~"  rnmored,  e^  o  sentiment.  ^ 

IIULES  FOR    WKITIXd    -TED,   -DED,  kV. 

143.  The  final  syllables  -ted  and  -ded,  are  generally  written 
with  a  half-length  j  or  |  ,  instead  of  adding  the  full  stroke 
to  the  primitive  form  of  the  word  ;  thus:  —  act,  !•  in  pref- 
erence to  ^~~\  acted;  /\*  repeatj  y^\^  not  /\j  rejjcatcd; 
~v    guide,  T^-  guided.  ,  #1'  i 

144.  When  a  word  contains  d-d,  or  t-d,  following  another 
down  stroke  sign,  it  is  sometimes  necessary  to  write  a 
detached  lialf-length  t    as   in      \',d<dcd,  ^y\    retreated. 

145.  The  half-length  ")  s,  for  the  sake  of  symmetry  and 
brevity,  may  be  written  upward  after  the  sAw-hook;  as 
■j     XeducationiM,    ^^    infationist. 

WIIEX  IIALF-LKNGTIIS  SllOUbl)  NOT  BE   USED. 
14().  Monosyllabic  words  eontainii:g  /  r.:id  d  should  be  writ- 
ten with   the   full  strokes,  leaving  the  b.alf-length  Hot  words 
containing  /  and  t;  thus:  ^^  lead,  ^^  aUotced;  /v"  Uglif,  l^  let. 

147.  When  r  is  followed  by  <  or  f/,  in  monosyllables  begin- 
ning with  ;•,   the   full-strokes  should  be  used;  as    ^-^i  right, 

{\rate,   /^    road,     since   half-length  /     rt   would   conflict 
with  the  word-sign    /  should,  and     ^  and, 

148.  In  words  of  two  or  more  syllables,  in  which  there  is 
but  one  consonant  beside  a  t  or  d,  the  latter  should  be  repre- 
sented   by  a  full     stroke:    as   ^^:^  poet,  \^ diet ;     ^"pf^  <-?»«/)//("</. 


92  AMERICAN    MANUAL 


149.  When  the  sound  of  t  or  d  is  the  final  consonant,  but 
followed  by  a  vowel,  the  full  stroke  must  be  written ;  as 
'^j^  faulty,  \/\  tardy;  also,  in  words  where  the  half-length 
cannot  be  clearly  indicated;  as  '^^^H  instead  of  ^~^^. 
moneyed;  ^""^^'  |  instead  of  <— -^'^^  animate;  ^  ]  instead  of 
(^     ■     looked;    \ .      instead     of    V :_    affect;    "^  |    in- 

stead   of  <=      '~  correct. 

Readixo  Exercise  XVII. 


\' 

-  <;- 

1. 

^' 

^ 

..J'. 

\d 

b. 

^ 

y^ 


'-^  .>i 


Writing  Exercise  XXI. 

Bad,  deed,  dead,  tight,  caught;  deeds,  doubts,  cheats, 
kites,  gets;  fate,  fat,  foot,  vote,  viewed,  thought,  sat, 
siglit,  shot,  late,  mate;  fights,  fits,  sets,  shoots,  meets, 
nights,  arts;  bride,  proud,  trot,  street,  flight,  fret,  fruit, 
threat,  throat,  shred;  plot,  blood,  glad,  flat,  float;  band, 
tend,  count,  gained,  rent,  find,  offend,  land,  lend,  mend; 
pant**,  attends,  rents,  finds,  lends,  minds;  repent,  refined, 
enjoined,  ordained,  pretends,  discounts;  advent,  advocate, 
definite,  replied,  requite,  reserved,  return,  returned,  retire, 
retired,  wayward,  heated,  habit 


OF  PHOXOURAPHY. 


93 


150.  HALF-LENGTH  WORD-SIGNS. 


y 


f  caught,  act 
1  could 
(  God 
I  good 
I  can Hot  " 
(  account 

called 

according 

great 

spirit 
(  part 

I.  opportunity 
I  gentleman 
1  gentlemen 


1      toward 
^      told 
(       thought 
that 
t'ithout 


I  tha 
^  1  wit 
.  I  sat 
'    {  set 


V, 


f  after 
1  future 
(  not 
1  nature 
f  went 
I  won't 
under 


/'  child 
^  world 
(;  Lord 
J  short 
"^  word 
f  held  or  hold 
light 
let 

might 
met 
— -      made 
wind 
ound 
">     wide 


C 


^ 


{:; 


loL  The  forms  ^  held  or  hold,  -^  made  and  w  under, 
which  are  given  in  the  above  table,  are  derived  from 
the  facts:  first,  that  (^  V,  ^^  wi/>,  and  -—^  no,  written 
half  length,  unconnected  with  other  strokes,  are  never 
needed;  second,  that  by  thickening  a  half  length  light-stroke 
the  addition  of  d  is  indicated,  and  not  t;  hence  /^  Id, 
■ — ■  md,  • — ml,  properly  represent  the  above  words. 

Reading   Exercise  XVIII. 

"    -^    ^      t    -     ^     '      ^      ^      ^.     ^    ^ 

S    I.  ^  ...t..  '  A.  X  ^   \,   -^^  ,s^  0     ^, 

)      <     .^     (    ,    ^     C,    ^.    \    /^^     aI      _  ^  X 


r' 


'V     c^ 


v"     %,x 


94  AMERICAN   MANUAL 


Writing  Exercise  XX 11 

God  is  as  good  as  he  is  great,  and  cannot  do  wrong. 

Tlie  word  of    tlie  Lord  is  given  as  our  guide  in  life. 

Freedom  of  thought  greatly  promotes  the  spirit  of  liberty. 

Reward  of  merit  is  one  of  the  greatest  incentives  to  effort. 

The  greatest  wealth  amounts  to  little  when  one  is 
called  to  part  with  it  all. 

Supply  and  demand,  according  to  the  laws  of  trade, 
are  supposed  to  regulate  prices. 

A  good  and  sound  mind  is-a  kind  of  divinity  lodged  in 
human  nature,  thal^is  a-blessing  to  all  about-it. 

A  good  man  is-a  gentleman  who  wants  good  laws  made, 
so-that  all  who  live  under-them  may  be  benefited. 

Tlie  man  who-is  without  God  in-this  great  world,  might 
be  looked  upon  as-a  ship  at  sea,  destitute  of  chart,  and 
not  bound  for  any  port   in  particular. 

Sin  cannot  remain- at-a  stand;  if  we  don't  retreat  from 
it,  we  are  sure  to-be  carried  with-it;  and-the  further  on 
we  go  the  more  we  will-have  to  return. 

REVIEW  OF  THE  TENTH  LESSON. 

(^135.)  IIow  may  the  power  of  t  or  d  bo  added  to  any  stroke? 
(^137.)  If  a  light  stroke  is  written  half-length,  which  is  generally  ad- 
ded a  <  or  rf?  If  a  heavy  stroke,  which?  (gl39.)  Hay  strokes  having 
circles,  loops,  and  hooks  be  halved?  Where  is  the  added  t  or  t/  read, 
in  the  case  of  half-length  strokes  ending  with  a  hook?  Whore  is  the 
t  or  d''  read,  in  case  a  half-length  ends  with  an  »-circlo  or  et-loop? 
(JJ142.)  May  half  length  strokes  be  written  at  the  beginning  or  middle 
of  words,  as  well  as  at  the  end?  (^143.)  How  are  the  syllables  ted 
and  (/<"(/ generally  written?  ((il44. )  When  ted  or  did  follow  a  pre- 
ceding down  stroke,  how  may  it  be  written?  (^146.)  When  should  l-d 
be  written  by  the  full  length  stnikes?  (^147.)  When  should  r-t  be 
written  in  full?  (  i/148  and  149.  )  In  what  other  cases  should  (  and  f/ 
bo  written  in  full?  (P50. )  Write  as  many  half-length  word- 
signs  as  you  can  remember. 


OF   PHONOGRAPHY.  95 


JlIi^tt0nl{|  Jiusm. 


PREFIXES,  AFFIXES,  AND  ABBREVIATIONS. 

Having  presented  all  the  rudimental  principles  of  the 
Phouogniphic  art,  the  learner's  attention  is  now  directed  to 
what  may  be  regarded  a.s  somewhat  arbitrary  and  unscientific 
features  of  tlie  system.  Tiiey  are  nevertheless  essential,  to 
avoid  lengthy  and  difficult  forms  for  long  words  and  to  afford 
sufficient  speed  in  writing. 

PREFIXES. 
152.  Com,  cox,  cum,  coo.— These  syllables  are  of  frequent 
occurrence,  both  initially  and  in  the  middle  of  words,  and 
therefore  claim  the  briefest  representation.  Com,  con  and 
cam,  when  beginning  a  sentence  or  line,  may  be  represented 
by  a  light  dot  written  near  the  beginning  of  the  following 
consonant;  thus:  \v  comply,  X^^  cottdemn,  "Y^  console, 
'^\^!^^cumbe)'som.e.  "When  preceded  by  a  consonant,  either  in 
the  same  or  a  preceding  word,  either  of  the  above  syllables  is 
indicated  by  proximity,  that  is,  by  writing  the  word 
close  to  the  preceding  consonant;  thus:  \  accompany, 
I  \^  decomposition,  ^/'o  v  circumscribe,  "^sT'  encumbered, 
V,yA  disconcerted,  ^^^\  reconcilable,  ^Y^  irreconcilable, 
<^,  incomplete,  /j— ^  recognize,  /C-  recoinniend,  and 
-;^  uncommon ;  so,  in  connection  with  a  preceding  word: 
,''^^   will  comj)ly,   /Q^  he  consented,  ^^^j>    and  commenced. 

Contra  and  counter  are  represented  by  a  short  djish,  written 
before    the   initial   end  of    the   following    consonant;    thus: 
I      contradict,  V     conlravoie,   I  —  counteract. 


96  AMERICAN    MANl'AL 


153.  In  cases  where  the  forms  would  not  be  mistaken  for 
other  words,  the  prefix  maj'  be  united  with  the  rest  of  the 
word ;  as :         I  ,  accommodation,    ^-p      inconsistent. 

154.  ExTER,  INTER. — These  syllables  have  heretofore  been 
represented  by  ^^  nt,  written  near  the  rest  of  the  word;  as 
^-^V   ^  intervieic,    '~'\^  introduce;    and   sometimes  joined,    as 

H'  interest.  But  since  the  more  extended  use  of  the  double- 
length  curved  signs,  it  is  about  as  convenient  and  speedy, 
generally,  to  write  "^ — -^iitr;  as:  ^  \<  interpose,'' — ^Xtj 
introduction. 

155.  Magna,  magne,  magni. — These  syllables  are  rep- 
resented by  '"^  written  over  the  first  part  of  the  rest  of  the 
word;  as:     ^'^     magnitude^  \^  magnify,   .| .  magnetic. 

15G.  Self. — As  a  prefix  this  word  is  represented  by  the 
s-circle,  generally  written  near  the  beginning  of  the  remain- 
der of  the  word;  as  °f  self-conceit,  /^"^  self-love;  but  in 
sf>me  words  the  circle  may  be  united  to  the  following  conso- 
nant without  ambiguity;  as:    V,_^  self-evident,  _^  selfish. 

157.  Ix  and  Ux. — When  the  treble  consonants  ^\  sjir, 
1  str,  a —  shr,  are  preceded  by  the  syllable  in  or  un,  it  is  in- 
convenient to  write  the  necessary.  ^-^  n;  hence  it  is  repre- 
sented by  a  joined  prefix  in  the  nature  of  an  n-hook;  thus; 

I  1  -,  instruction,^  K^inscription,  "^  insuperable.  This 
hook  is  also  convenient  in  .such  wordsX  as:  \/^"^'  insolvent, 
~-</^  unseemly^      Y     inconsiderable. 

TEllMIATIONS  AND  AFFIXES. 

There  are  numerous  of  terminal  syllables,  having  many 
words  in  each  class,  that  may  l)e  much  more  Itriefly  and 
speedily  indicated  than  written  out  in  full : 

158.  Ity,  Ities. — The  terminations,  -ify  and  -ities,  may  be 
represented  by  writing  the  previous  consonantal  stroke  half 


V      \     ^-^\ 


Q_^ 


OF   PHONOGRAPHY.  •  97 


length ;  as :  ^-^  affahilitrj,  *^— ^  sensibility,  ^  fidelity, 
^_f-^    integrity,     ^      poverty,  V^     finality,  ■ — ^  minorities, 

V'    facilities. 

1;)9.  -Ble  and  -bly. — When  it  is  inconvenient  to  form 
the  hook  for  the  final  syllable  ble  or  bly,  it  may  be  omitted ; 
as :    '<_Jis^^^     sensible,  (  fashionable-y . 

IGO.  -Blexess,  -fulness,  -iveness,  -lessness. — These 
terminations     may    be    represented    by     strokes    written 

thus :  ^~%,.   affabltness,    ;i_^V      sinfulness,    Q ^\sensitiveness, 

^  (^^  heartlessness. 

IGl.  -Ing  and  -INGS, — When  it  is  not  convenient  to  Write 
the  stroke  ^_^  ny  or  ^-^  ngs,  the  syllable  ing  may  be  repre- 
sented by  a  dot  at  the  end  of  the  preceding  consonant, 
and  ings  by  an  s-circle  in  the  same  place,  thus:  I  doing, 
j'^    joining,  \     buildings. 

162.  -Ly  is  sometimes  more  readily  written  by  disjoining; 
as:     ~^/^  kindly,  KrS/^   humanely. 

1G3.  -Mental,  -mentality. — Eepresented  by  writing 
—^.mnt  disjoined;  thus:  x—)  fundamental,  y—:,  instrumentality. 

1G4.  -Alogy  and  -OLOGY  may  be  represented  by  dis- 
joining   /  j;  thus:   ^y^  genealogy,  \o/  phrenology. 

1G5.  Self  and  selves  are  represented,  the  first  by  an 
a-circle,  and  the  latter  by  a  ses-circle,  either  joined  or  dis- 
joined; thus:  ''"^  niyself  /^  yourself,  L    themselves, 

166,  Ship  is  represented  by  the  stem  /y  sh,  disjoined 
when  more  convenient  to  so  write  it;  as  ^  lordship, 
CJ>y    oionership. 

1G7.  AVord-signs    may  be    written    either    as    prefixes  or 

affixes;    thus:    V^^ forsake,    v.^^^  afternoon,  r    withhold, 

>J?  understand. 


'    98  AMERICAN    MANUAL 


Reading  Exercise  XIX. 


Writing  Exercise  XX  [II,  \ 
Combine,  combination,  compare,  commutation,  communi- 
ty; consider,  concerning,  congregate,  conduce,  connK)se, 
conjecture  conspire;  accomplish,  accomplice,  accommodate; 
circumvent,  circumference,  circumflex;  decomposed,  discon- 
nected, encumber,  inconsiderate,  incongruity;  reconsider, 
recumbent,  recommendation,  recognition,  recompense;  un- 
concerned, uncompromising;  entertain,  interested,  interpre- 
tation, interruption;  magnitude,  magnetism,  magnanimity; 
self-interest,  self-defense,  self-control;  instruct,  instrument, 
inspiration,  insujierable,  insolu})le,   enslave. 

Probability,  feasibility,  durability,  regularity,  irregularity, 
plurality,  singularity;  forcible  actionable,  erascible,  sur- 
mountable ;  saleableness,  reasonableness,  serviceableness ; 
v/ilfulness,  usefulness,  spitefulness,  combativeness,  nianful- 
ness;  heedlessness;  thoughtlessness;  putting,  playing, 
spreading,  dreading,  repeating,  plottings,  biddings,  headings; 
supplemental,  rudimental,  instrumentality;  kindly,  secondly, 
physiology,  theology;  himself,  herself;  ourselves;  worship, 
leadership,  workmanship.  > 


3 


r 


OF   PHONOGRAPHY.  99 


OMISSION  OF  VOWELS. 

In  §36,  Rule  4,  directions  were  given  in  regard  to  tlie 
omission  of  tlie  vowel  e  in  the  initial  syllables  he,  de,  and  re. 
The  learner  may  now  begin  to  omit  other  unaccented  vowels, 
writing  in  only  such  as  are  necessary  to  indicate  each  word 
beyond  a  doubt. 

168.  The  statement  may  seem  strange,  that  the  omission  of 
many  of  the  vowel  signs,  so  far  from  obscuring  the  legibility 
of  phonography,  actually  contributes  to  its  simplicity  and  the 
ease  with  which  it  may  be  read,  as  well  as  written.  In  ordi- 
nary longhand,  and  even  in  common  print,  words  are  read  by 
their  outline,  their  length,  and  the  familiar  number  of 
ascending  and  descending  strokes;  and  just  so  it  is  in  phono- 
graphic writing,  the  outlines  of  words  are  not  changed  by  the 
failure  to  insert  all  the  dots  and  dashes.  Most  words 
differ  from  each  other  in  form,  by  reason  of  being  com- 
posed of  different  consonants,  or  the  same  consonants  in 
different  positions,  and  hence  are  recognized  one  from 
another  without  much  reference  to  their  vowels. 

169.  The  following  words  illustrate  the  principle  of  insert- 
ing only  the  accented  vowels:  \^  obey,  ^ — y/^  capital, 
/}       radical,   [X^\  terrible. 

170.  It  is  seldom  necessary  to  insert  a  vowel  when  it  comes 
in  a  syllable  represented  by  the  double  consonant  ^  pr  or 
'x^  jA;  thus:    \ ^  permit,  V^       vocal,  2.,—jGerman. 

171.  It  is  also  unnecessary  to  vocalize  the  double-circle 
o  8-s,  the  rest  of  the  outline,  and  sometimes  the  sense  of  the 
sentence,     indicating    what    the    vowel    should    be;    thus: 

vO<      necessary,    _:.^    exercise. 

172.  When  a  word  begins  or  ends  with  a  vowel,  it  is 
better,  in  ordinary  writing,  to  insert  it;  as  y~  ^^'^^j 
[ attack,    /\  ready. 


100  ,  AMERICAN    MANUAL 


DISSYLLABIC    DIPHTHONGS. 


173.  Besides  the  regular  diphthougs  '  i,  ''  oi,  ^  ow,  «  «, 
treated  of  in  g30,  and  the  irregular  diphthongs,  «  we, 
>  wo,  «  yea,  "  yaio,  etc.,  given  in  §121  and  §128,  it  is  found 
convenient  to  represent  by  a  single  sign,  the  sounds  of  two 
vowels  occurring  in  different  syllables,  but  with  no  interven- 
ing consonant,  as  buy-o-net,  re-al,  mu-se-um.  The  following 
scale  of  inclined  acute  angles,  provides  for  representing  these 
dissyllabic  vowels  without  lifting  the  pen  : 

I  ah-i        ^-|  a-i        ^|  e-i        "^j  aw-i       vj  o-i  I  oo-I 

174.  The  fourth  in  the  series  will  be  recognized  as  the  same 
sign,  and  representing  nearly  the  same  sound  as  the  regular 

diphthong  oi  and  oy,  in  \  hoy,  . r~  coil.     The  other  signs 

represent  similar  modifications;  thus :  /^^z^  hurrahing, 
"^  clayey,  )^  saying;  x^^  f>fing,  and  the  same  sign  in 
fj^'  theory,  and  ^~^  ^  mtiaeum;  X  boyish,  [^  stoic, 
~/iy  Owen,        )  Louise.  — 

Of  course  it  lis  not  necessary  that  these  signs  should 
always  be  used,  since  the  separate  signs  may  generally  be 
inserted,  if  for  the   sake  of  simplicity  or  precision  they  are 

preferred;    as     in     the    words:       F   •   satcing,      Q y.sriowy, 

^_^'  mayor,    )•  Isaiah. 

175.  It  is  sometimes  convenient  to  be  able  to  add  a  simple 
vowel  sign  to  a  diphthong,  without  lifting  the  pen;  hence  it 
is  allowable  to  write  a  tick  at  an  acute  angle  for  T,  and  a  tick 
at  a  right  angle  for  o  or  a:  thus:  j^  dewy,  I  defying, 
^^^^ enjoying,  ST  bias,   \/^  biology.  ^~' 


OF     PHONOGllAPHY.  101 


Writing    Exercise    XXIV. 

Payee,  clayey,  being,  deity,  beatific,  theater  theory^ 
theorize,  theoretical;  flawy,  strawy;  billowy,  stoic, 
heroic;  zoolite,  zoology;  bowie-knife,  St.  Louis,  Lewis, 
truism ;  bias,  biased,  diameter,  diadem,  diagram, 
miasma,     Elias,     biography,     biology,     employe'. 

The  payee  of  the  note,  Elias  Lewis,  being  in  St.  Louis, 
as  an  employe',  heroically  drew  a  diagram  of  his  bowie- 
knife,  and  wrote  his  own  biography.  Theologians  theoreti- 
cally locate  Deity  in  regions  beatific,  with  diadems  of 
glory  to  crown  all  who  faithfully  serve  him.  Billowy  are 
the  waves,  but  the  zoologist  pursues  his  study  of  biology. 

176.— THE  RULE  OF  POSITION. 

The  rule  for  indicating  what  vowel  should  be  read  in  any 
word  left  unvocalized,  was  presented  briefly  in  §51,  as  ap- 
plied to  the  word-signs.  Its  more  general  application,  eai^e- 
cially  in  reporting,  will  be  here  stated: 

177.  Contracted  words,  and  words  having  but  one  or  two 
consonant  strokes,  are  written  in  the  first  position,  that  is, 
above  the  line  of  writing,  if  the  accented  vowel  or  diph- 
thong in  the  word  be  a  first-place  one;  thus:  r~°  ('««««, 
;; — ^'^^calm,  \^  vile. 

178.  If  the  accented  vowel  or  diphthong  be  second-place, 
the  consonant  stroke,  or  strokes,  are  written  on  the  line ; 
thus;  —t^  case,  (Tx^ smoke,    \ ^  decays,  /^"^  repose. 

179.  If  the  accented  vowel  or  diphthong  be  third-place, 
vertical  and  inclined  strokes  are  written  through  the  line; 
thus:  \-i peace,   Y;z^d€e7n,---^-^roomf^^^-Europe.      In  the 

case  of  horizontals,  words   containing  the  diphthongs  ow,  u, 


102  AMERICAN   MANUAL 


ew,  are  written  under  the  line  ;  thus :  — -j  gown,  ":l^'  account, 

A  A 

:    n  accuse. 


The  second  position,  that  is  on  the  line,  is  the  most  natural 
and  easy  to  write  in;  therefore  the  rule  of  position  should 
be  observed  only  with  respect  co  those  words  which  if  left 
un vocalized  might  be  read  for  other  words. 

180.  Exceptional  Word-Signs. — The  following  words  of 
frequent  occurrence,  for  the  sake  of  convenience,  and  because 
they  will  not  interfere  with  other  words,  are  written  on  the 
line,  out  of  position:  Are,  be,  been,  dear,  do,  far,  from,  have, 
he,  it,  shall,  think,  upon,  use,  usually,  was,  which,  unll,  your. 
To  avoid  clashing  with  other  words,  written  in  the  same  way 
and  in  their  true  positions,  the  following  are  written  out  of 
position:  Any,  go,  ago,  more,  much,  number,  0,  over, 
particular,  this,  those,  though,  true. 

The  writing  and  reading  of  words,  out  of  |x»sition  as  well 
as  in,  comes  by  habit,  and  causes  no  hindrance  to  the  expert. 

OMISSION  OF  CONSONANTS. 

181.  Besides  the  omission  of  consonants  in  the  use  of  pre- 
fixes and  affixes,  it  is  allowable  to  omit  certain  consonant 
signs  that  are  scarcely,  if  at  all,  heard  in  ordinary  pronuncia- 
tion, and  others  that  it  is  difficult  to  form  in  some  connec- 
tions: 

K  and    G — in  such  words  as :  q_P    sanction,  -^  anxiety. 

T — in  such  words  as:    '^    ^r-^  mistake,      ^j-'^  postmaster. 

/ 
P — in  such  words  as:  f^'~"    lumped,    cr—  stamped. 

N- — in   words    like:    r  attain,     [•       attainment;     '\    assign, 

T    assignment ;  !•  strain,   \1    stranger;    \    trance,  I    transmute. 

R-Hook — As  in  :  \down,  J  downward;^  lord,  /^*>  landlord. 


OF  PHONOGRAPHY.  •  103 


Writing  Exercise  XXV. 
Distinction,  distinguish,  junction,  function,  anxious 
postpone,  postage,  mostly,  lastly,  restless,  testify, 
testimony,  New  Testament,  attempt ;  cramped,  tramped, 
dumped  ;  atonement,  postponement,  appointment,  stranger) 
translation,     landscape. 

A  wise  man  may  seem  ridiculous   in  a  company  of  fools. 
Advise  not  what  is  most  pleasant,  but  what  is  most  useful. 
Argument  seldom  convinces  any  one  against  his  inclination. 
Bad  luck  itself   is  good  for  something  in  a  wise  man's  hand. 
Business  may  be  troublesome,  but  idleness  is  pernicious. 
Charity  and  pride  have  different  aims,  yet  both  feed  the  poor. 
Comparison,  more  than  reality,  makes  men  happy  or  wretched. 
Courage,  conduct  and  perseverance  conquer  all  before  them. 
Do  not  look  upon  a  vessel  but  upon  that  which  it  contains. 
Euiuhition  is  lively  and  generous,  envy  base  and  malicious. 
Fortune  dreads  the  brave  and  is  only  tolerable  to  the  coward. 
Game  is  cheaper  in  the  market  than  in  the  fields  or  woods. 
Government  of  the  will  is  better  than  increase  of  knowledge. 
Grc;U  minds  are  easy  in  prosperity  and  quiet  in  adversity. 

REVIEW  OF  THE  ELEVENTH  LESSON'. 

(iJ152. )  How  aro  tho  prefixes  com,  con,  cum,  and  roif  indicated? 
(^l.')4.)  How  are  infrr  and  intro  represented?  (j^laS. )  How  are  mni/nrt, 
m'KjHc,  mdijni  represented?  (jjl-'jC.)  How  is  the  prefix  sc//"  written? 
(iJl.')7.)  How  may  the  initial  syllables  in  and  un  be  written  before  the 
treble  consonants  »pr,  nir,  ka.l  (^158.)  IIoW  are  the  affixes,  -alityf 
-«(■(>_(/,  etc.,  represented?  (^159.)  How  arc -?(//•  and -///^  written?  (160.) 
How  -hlcnenK,  -fiilncitK,  -iocneKn,  -lemiiicssf  ( j^lGl.)  Howare  tn;/ and  ings 
written?  (j!lf)3.)  How  are  Hioiffr/ and  wrH<rtf/tV^  written?  ^iJlf),5.)  How 
»p//' and  nclvi't?  (^l()(i.)  How  xhipf  (iJlG9.)  What  is  the  rnle  in  re. 
gard  to  the  omission  of  vowels?  (JJITS.'I  Explain  the  dissyllabic 
diphthongs,  and    the  niiunier  of  writing  them. 


104 


AMEKKAX    MANTAL 


Reading  Exercise  XX. 


-p  i< 


\ 


r    ^    ^   ^,  \     '^-  ^-  ->K. 


^1^  ^"V. 


\ 


/'^ 


/^ 


.Y- 


oa 


4^    '-^•^■~/    gjv^.    V '"^    \      -I-     r^         %' 


v_P       c       1      s     )•     K)    ^    ^^  -^  I   ^P  -^   ^- 


L_X 


L  ^   o 


I     C^      ^     .N^^     1,       ^      ^>^<^v 


il^ 


•VLvT^Cp 


(T'- 


K_S> 


t^ 


^^ 


■^ 


V-l-o 


4- 


"^o 


r.^"  >  g^  <^    ^ 


>^T2 


4^! K- 


C^ 


^ 


o 


•)^ 


O^  ^    I  p/> 


^      \5 


%  ^  °^      ,      (-         ^      ^    , 


V        ^7K 


1^  >    -;::h    ^    ^    "1 


^ 


>^J>     > 


.:fi^ 


^    -  %    V-     r^iJ 


/^  V. 


V^ 


\\  ^   \^1. 


v-^     X 


OF    PHONOGRAPHY.  105 


EXERCISE  ON  PREFIXES  AND  AFFIXES. 
£ey  to  Heading  Exercise  JCJC,  page  98,  to  be  copied. 

Learn  to  accommodate  yourself  to  circumstances.  Self- 
respect  is  incomijatible  with  self-esteem. 

Study  condensation  in  your  style  of  composition, •  and  thus 
contravene  constant  criticism. 

JIagnificent  entertainments  are  often  accompanied  by  the 
most  useless  and  inconsiderate  expenditures. 

We  should  postpone  taking  testimony,  so  as  not  to  incom- 
mode the  postmaster  and  stranger. 

It  is  inconsistent  with  truth  to  say  that  compassion  and 
friendship  are  but  selfishness  in  disguise. 

If  the  earth  be  circumscribed  at  the  equator,  we  obtain  its 
greatest  circumference. 

Its  magnitude  is  not  inconceivable,  although  we  may  not 
appreciate  its  amazing  vastness. 

We  can  form  no  distinct  conception  of  infinity  while  occu- 
pying contracted  space. 

Sensibility  unitetl  with  criminality  is,  of  course,  one  of  the 
possibilities  of  human  nature. 

It  was  a  fundamental  theory  of  the  stoics  that  nothing 
should  be  conceded  to  the  emotions. 

Our  landlord  makes  a  mistake  in  not  distinguishing  be- 
tween strangers  and  tramps. 

A  St.  Louis  merchant  made  an  assignment  on  the  theory  of 
doing  justice  to  his  creditors. 

The  truths  of  inspiration,  though  not  self-evident,  neither 
are  they  inscrutable. 

Translations  of  the  New  Testament  have  been  made  into 
nearly  all  the  known  languages  of  the  earth. 

Tiie  plotting-;  of  politicians  for  leadership  are  wonderful 
illustratiuns  of  seifisliness. 

Regularity  and  punctuality  are  important  qualifications  in 
any  pursuit. 

Irregularity  and  interruption  in  business  affliirs  are  insu- 
l)erable  obstacles  to  success. 


'     106  AMEKl'CAX    JfAXlAL 


itMi 


mmm   iitssm. 


OUTLINES  OF  WORDS,  PHRASEOGRAPHY,   &C. 

182.  The  learner  has  no  doubt  been  impressed  with  tlie  fact 
that  not  only  may  the  same  word  be  written  in  several  differ- 
ent ways,  but  entirely  different  words  may  be  written  in  the 
same  way,  that  is,  with  the  same  consonant  outlines;  as,  for 
instance,  ^_  prosecute,  persecute.  This  may  seem,  on  first 
thought,  an  objection  to  Phonography ;  but  the  same  objec- 
tion exists  in  regard  to  common  longhand,  many  words  being 
written  so  nearly  alike — persecute  and  prosecute  among  the 
number — that  printers  are  often  puzzled  to  know  what  word 
was  intended  to  be  written  by  the  author  of  their  "copy." 
But  the  very  fact  that  the  phonographic  system  renders  it  pos- 
sible to  write  the  same  word  differently,  enables  the  skillful 
writer  to  give  very  different  outlines  to  words  that  are  ordi- 
narily written  much  alike;  thus  the  two  words  above  are 
clearly  distinguished  as  follows:  "N^  prosecute,  \^~^  pcr- 
secute;  so  with  ]•  trai7i,  p^  turn;  ^^  proceed,  \^^  pursued. 

183.  In  a  similar  way  a  distinction  is  made  between  words 
having  a  positive  and  negative  meaning;  as  /^    responsible, 

\  irresponsible;  y"'^  resolute,  ^^X^  irresolute.  These  forms 
come  under  the  rules  for  the  use  of  downward  and  upward  r. 
But  there  are  other  words,  of  opposite  meaning,  that  must  be 
distinguished  by  doubling  a  consonant  stroke  that  represents 
part  of  the  difference  in  meaning  ;  thus:  ^ — ^/~  mafrnal, 
im-material ;         ^ — ~      legal,    ^^  U-legai; 

necessary,   ^iy,fy^  un-necessary. 


'  OF  PHONOGRAPHY.  107 

WORDS  DISTINGUISHED  BY  DIFFERENCE  OF  OUTLINE. 
184.  When  two  or  more  words  follow  one  outline  they  are 
distinguished   from    each   other   by  vowel-position ;    when  a 
vowel  should  be  inserted  it  is  marked  in  italic. 
Ptbl  V       compatible,!  potable,^  computable;''     j   pitiable. 

Plt-d  \.       patted,'     appetite, •      petted,^    pitied;       \    potato. 

I'tns \       competence,'  pittancej*  "^^^.i?  aptness. 

Ptrf  \/V_    petrify;       "^    putrefy. 

Ptrfkshn    v^^—D  petrification;         ^^         putrification. 

Ptrn Vi      patron;    V^^  pattern. 

Pstr X)      pastor,'  poster;^  \    compositor,'  pastry;^  \p      pas- 

°|  l/ture. 

Pshnt  ....      \3      patient;   \.  passionate. 

Pshns...  Xq  passions;'         patience.^ 

Pnr \^  opener,*  pioneer;'     )/    penury. 

Pltr. ^  plotter;' \/  pelter;  ^^  I  paltry,'  poultry .« 

Plj    \  pledge;      v/  apology,  pillage. 

Pis \(  palace,'  appeals,'''  police;-''  \/^  pol'cy. 

Plst-d  ^  placed,2  pleased;'  "s,^  placid. 

Plshn       . .  \j  completion;   \'       compulsion,  compilation. 

Pint  ^  pliant,'  \planet,  plenty,\^    opulent. 

frps.  \)  purpose;     ^\  perhaps,         propose. 

Prprt         .    %.^    appropri-^  /,  property,  <N^propri-\/vpur- 

ato;  ^^1  -^     ety,      ^    ^  port. 

Prprshn       ^\^     appropriation,     ^    p    pre-  c\      proportion. 

^  \i  ^^y^^     paration,     \v 

Prprshnt.       \        proportionate,         \      proportioned. 

Prt  ^      part.'  \/  apart;  port. «         \A  Pi""itv  C\  pretty. 

upright,'    ^  '  ] 

Prt-d-kshn    C\    -,    protection,  %       production,'''    prediction. 


108  AMERICAN    MANTAL 

Prtv ^  comparative,  \/t     operative. 

Prtn ^  pertain;     \^.-v_-'  appertain. 

Prtnd  ....       ^  pretend,\/^^  portend. 

Prtns ^  pretence;    ^       prettiness;\/ss^  pertness, 

J  '^  l_9*^  '  uprightness, 


Prtr 
Prd 


CV  portray ;     0>     operator ;      ^^ — .    porter. 

'X  prude:      v,^ paired:    \/l    parody,'  parade,^  period. 

Prch \  approach,    preach:     \yy   parch,'  perch,*  porch. 2 

Prfkshn .  .      \)-0  perfection,       ^         provocation. 

Prfr '\  proffer;  ^\j'^    prefer;  \/\^  periphery. 

Prvs ^  previous;    \/Vo  pervious,  ^\>  prophecy. 

Pra  %3  pra^te;    V^     pierce,     \/   peruse,  \/)   pursue. 

Prspr  ....    'X  prosper;    "^^y    perspire. 

P*^' ^  priest*       ^~K    poorest,  \/ purest,    \/[  pursuit. 

Prskt <^  prosecute;  \.^  persecute. 

Prskshn..    ^   ~»  prosecution;  \/^~^  persecution. 

P"r ^^,^^  oppressor;  \/0     pursuer,  \^^  peruser. 

Pi^n- ^\j_,  person;   \y'~^     parson,^  comparison,  Parisian. 

Prsnt       ..   ^^  present:  X.^   Srsrate.N/XP— '• 

P"l- ^^^  parcel,  parsley;    \     A    parasol,  perusal, 

Prsh. '\J  Prussia;  \y/)  Persia. 

Prshn      . .     X^  o^eratfon"'  ^   port'on,   apportion. 

Prmnt      .  '\^_^  prominent,' permanent ;*    ^\^_^.^^   pre-eminent. 

Pi^ls X/^  paralyze.i   ^^-^^  peerless.a      V^pearls. 

Bs  \  abase,*  abuse ,^       bias.' 

Bst V.  biased,' best,' boast,' beast:''   Np bestow,  beset. 

Bndr \  binder,'  bender;*  \^  bindery,'  boundary.* 


OF   PHOXOGRAPHY. 


109 


abundant,   ^  abandoned. 

bribe,  \/\  barb. 

bright, •  ^  broad. 

break,'-  broke,''  brick,''  brook:''    \/       bar'.:. 

broth,'  breath:'-    \^  birth. 

abrasion:     v^  abortion,' aberration. ^ 

brain,^  brown;'      v^   born,'  barren,'  burn.'^ 

brand,'  \^'  burnt, ^\^  brunette,      >^  brandy. 

broll.^'' V^  ^^"'^'  M^  '^"'■'''''  V^  barely. 

riar,     /\/ brewery:     \.y^   barrier,  borrower, 
brewer:'     *^  '        V^ 

bearer,  borer. 

traitor,   T-^  torture,  j/''^  tartar,     1X  territory. 

contrive;'        j    trophy,    [/tariff,    U^   terrify. 

train;  l/^turn,  torn; '^^ attorney:  l/'        tyranny. 

trained;  [^  torrent,  tyrant;    l^_^  eternity,  truant. 

auditor,'   deter;      J    daughter,'    debtor,'   doubter;' 

editor;     (/^auditory,  dietary. 

detriment;  k^^     determined. 

defence,  defines;     I         defiance. 

defray,  deform  ;[/^ defer,       tr>^  devour. 

divers,  adverse;   Itn    divorce,  diverse.  • 

destine,  \~^    destiny. 

disease,    b     decease,  I    diocess.' 

damnation,'  dimension:'^  ''"—;?  domination, 

adultery;    "^^   idolatry;  H^  idolater. 

dryness,'  dearness;'-    J/^  adorns,  durance. 

chart;    /'chariot;  /^«harity. 


Bndntd 

^ 

Brb 

\ 

Brt 

<\ 

Brk 

'V. 

Brth. 

^ 

Brshn 

% 

Brn 

•^ 

Brnt-d. 

'^ 

Brl    

^^ 

Brr   

\ 

\ 

Trtr 

\ 

Trf 

\ 

Trn 

3 

Trnd    .. 

0 

Dtr 

\ 

s 

Dtrmnt-d 

V 

Dfns     . 

u 

Dfr 

I 

Dvrr 

i 

Dstn 

t 

1 

Dss-z    . . 

:s 

Dninshn  . 

i-^i 

Dltr 

1  ' 

Drns  ... 

u 

Chrt 

? 

110 


AMERICAN    MANUAL 


Jnt    . 

Jntl. 


<y      gen 


t,      </    giant.' 


agent,^ 


/■      genteel,  ^^V      gentle-j;  v/   Gentile. 


agency. 


Jns j/  joins;    <i!^  genius;  ^ 

Ktr  __^  actor.i  cutter:^      j^  catarfh;  ""V^  coterie. 

Ksprshn . .  — «\j  expression;  V^  expiration. 

Kst-d  — ^  cost,'   kissed;''      f  caused. 

Kskrt 6~  execrate;         o     •    excoriate. 

Kstnshn. .       p  extenuation;  '     ^  extension, 

J^lP^ '^ — S^  eclipse,    __/Ao  collapse. 

^It' "^  clatter,' culture;^    __/      collator. 

^^^ ■= clock,'  cloak,*  clique;^  _/'      colic,  calico. 

Klzsnn  . . .    c__)  collision,'  conclusion;*  __/^coalition,  collusion. 

Krprl <^    '\^  corporal;   '^^\^      corporeal. 

'^^ '^~  cart,'  accord,^  court,*  accrued;^ 

'^'tr I- — ^  carter,'  creature:*  ^    ^|  creator; 

Gd    God,'  good,*       |  guide,  gaudy. 

Grdn ^^~~^  garden,  '^  guardian. 

Fvrt-d. . . .   ^  favorite;    ^^_^    favored. 


accurate. 
^  curator. 


■.\ 


Fktr V '     factor;    V factory. 

Fns \3      fines,'  feigns,*  fence;  Vv_.    g  offense,  affiance. 

Fnrl v^^  funeral;  Vj-^funereal. 

Fir vL       floor,*  flour;^    Q_/flowery;\_/^>  follower, failure. 

Frtn A^_^  fortune,    ^-i  frighten,     V./^  fourteen. 

Frs Vo       offers,' phrase,*  freeze;^    ^^   ^     *;^'    \P  furious. 

Frm V^-— ^    firm,'  frame:       \.  farm,' 

Frns ^\J)  furnace,*   V_/'^  conference,'  V^/~"~^  fairness. 

V ' . 


OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


Ill 


y,-     frail,  furl;  V/'"  furlough;^  freely;^  v.  farewell. 

V^_^      forward;  V.^    froward. 
VJ)     valuation,  convulsion;  V^/^  violation. 


Frl. 
Frwrd . 
Vlshn 
A' Ins  . 
Vrt  . . 
Sprt-d. 
Sprst. 
St  ... 
Std... 
Stshn 
Stni. . 
Stn  .. 
Str  .. 

Strn 
Sds  ., 
Sst... 
Snitr  . 
Sntr. 
Sns  . . 
Snr  .  . 
Sltr. 
Shrdl 
>Ipshnt-d. 
Mshn 
Mshnr 


^  /^    •   1  V      ^-.   o  villainous,  I  ., 

Vy      violence;     V  /^-^     -,,  V      vileness. 

'     V/  viUanies;       >- 

C-  overt, convert;    C     virtue,        V^/l  variety,  verity. 

"^  spirit,'  separate;-    \/  support,  °\   spread. 

"^  suppress;   V.^^sparse;    V^spurious:\/9  *'""*'^""" 

f  citj^'  ^  ^**'*  ^'Sht,i  sought;  set,2sit,3east,'' 

P  stead,  state  ;2  steed,  stood;''  f  gty***^'   )  estate. 

Q,  station;      rsituation;   )  citation. 

c^^  stefti,'  steam;*  V    ^  asthma,'  esteem.' 

J^  satin,' Satan;  2  c^i^   stony  stain. 

1  stray;     )  star,  store;-   c^  story;  ^astray. 

)  oyster,' easter;2    i.  austere,  astir. 

2  strain;       o  stern;        ]  eastern;  ^/^  Saturn. 

P  seeds,    seduce;^     J  acids,  assiduous. 

^  assist;  i    consist;         )  essayist;  J  society. 

<S     ^  smatter,'  scymitar;'   cr^/^  cemetery,  symmetry. 

0      ^  centre,  senator;  |  sentry;    ^~^\/^  century. 

Q_9  signs,'  sense;'^  )       science,  assigns,'  assignees.* 

io_^  sinner;     _     y^  scenery;  ^^'^  sneer;  ^      assignor, 
slaughter;  g"''^  solitary;  ^\  sultry. 


shrewdlv:  J ^  assuredly, 
impassioned,        j  unpassionate. 


/-^ 


lotion,"  motion, 2  mission;*     (J  machine. 


missionary,     ^    machinery. 


112  AMERICAN   MANUAL 


,,     ,  monster  '    /^~;s      .    .  .        ^~~ — P  / 

Mnstr  ^ — -<3minister;2       1  ™»°'stry:         ^X  monastery. 

Mrtr-dr.  '^     ^^  martyr, i  murder;  ^-~^\  marauder. 

Mrtrs-drs  C      ^  murders'*         o  murderous;  ^^  murderess, 

Ndkshh.  ^"-^     ^indication;  1    -,  induction. 

\dfnt-d  ' — 1_^  indefinite;  ^^  undefined. 

Ndls.    ....     '7^     endless:^  >_/       needless.* 

Njns.  ^^-^      ingenious:     ^^^  ingenuous. 

Nvt-d-bl  "~— ^  inevitable;!  unavoidable.' 


Nvshn   .  , .'  \9  innovation:  ^vj  invasion. 

Lbrt-d       .  /^  labored:  ill-bred;  (C      elaborate. 

Lt-td  /^     latitude,      /^j  altitude. 

Ltr  /^    latter,!  lighter,i  letter;^  ^y^  lottery;  f\  ultra. 

Lkl Z"^—  likely,'  local;^ ^  luckily. 

Lrnt-d.  (P     learnt;     (j^  learned. 

Rprshn  .   .  /'X)  repression;  /'X/    reparation. 

Rtr /o  -•;-:  --^X;'/^-'^-'^-^-^- 

Rv, y^  rave,  rove;  /V^  review;      ^     arrive. 

Rvl     y^^  rival,       revel;  /KJ       reveil;    ^    arrival. 

Rsm.  y^~^  resume;  />— n  reassume. 

Rnd  y^^  ruined;  X^~A  renewed.     /^    (wronged.) 

Rlr ^  roUer,2  railer,*  ruler;*    "V^   earlier. 

Wt-d       ..      "^  white,*  weighed,^  wooed;')  wet.*  wit.* 

Wr   (y^  wire.i  were,*  we-are;»  v^  war;        >  wear. 

Wnt-d.    . .       "5  wand,' wind,' waned,!  wound;*  ^  wont,  <-■  went. 

HI y^  hail,  hale:   ^-'^~  holy;    i^  howl. 

Hr  .  . . :    . .       "^  hire,'  her,»  here^*  /^^^^  hero,  hairy,  hurrah. 


OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 


^ 

113 


CONTRACTED  WORDS. 

Ill  addition  to  the  word-signs  heretofore  given,  represent- 
ed by  the  alphabetic  sigfls,  simple  and  compound,  the  follow- 
ing contracted  forms  have  come  into  general  use.  They  rep- 
resent the  more  prominent  consonants  in  each  word,  so  joined 
as  to  be  most  readily  written,  and  at  the  same  time  suggest 
the  pronunciation  of  the  word  : 


^      Abundant-ly 
/     acknowledge 


i 


J, 


acquaint-aiice-ed' 
advantageous 
_advcrtise-ing' 
.advertismeat* 


^^    almost' 
inost^ 

'     al  read  y 

C     although 

----^   anybody' 
nobody* 

— — '  anythine' 


_i\_r^appear-ed3 

^     appointment' 

apprehend 
<^       comprehend 

^     ^    astonish-ed-ment' 
\,^_^     Bankable 

\^       bankrupt-cy 

\ become 

V         busv-iness 


Capable 
.captain 


K-N     democrat-cy 


-describe 


^    catholic-ism 
'^A^_  certificate 
_/_change-ed 
^^ character' 


(j-^  description 
L  .  determine 
L       develop 


r 


circumstantial'' 
citiJen^  I 

i 
_  commercial 

confidential 

consequent-ly 

consistent 

construction 


P 

^  convention 

— 15~>  custom 

__g-v  customer 

<j->,  December 

\j  defendant 

\j->^  deficient 

J  delinquent 


difficult-y» 

P      disadvantage 
J       downward' 
^      Especially 

<_y    essentially 

2       establish-ed- 
-N; —  ment' 


(j_^    distinguish 
^..^     everybody 

V_      evidence-t 
^     except 
r     M  exist-ed-cnce 


I    V_     expect 
^      expense-sive 

^^  experiencc-ed 


A 14 


AMKKKAN    MANl'AI. 


^ 


I 


Xj 


express-  age 

.extraordinary 
■extravagant 
February 
former 
fonvard-£d 
furnish 
Government 
guilty^ 
Heretofore 
-herewith' 

Immoderate-ly* 
immediate  ly' 

impartial 

incapable 

inconsiderate 

inconsistent 

independence- 
en  t-ly 

indispensable 

Individ  ual-ly' 
indulgence 

inexperienced* 
influenced" 
inform -cd* 
information 
instruction 


y      intelligence-ent-ly 

L-N  intemperance-te 

T     "^  interest-ing^d 

b      introduction 

Sp    investigation 

~^—    irregular-ity-ly 


irrespective 
irresjionsible 
/^^y    January 


Knowledge 
.  Landlord^ 


'  /      legislate-ure 
'0     legislation 
'       v^  locomotive 
^-^ Magnanimons-ly' 

niagnificent-cncc-l  J  a 


1/  manufactory 
'^~\_  manufacture 
'^""i/  ma  n  u  f acturer 
^-v-N     memorandum 
^^~Y^   mercantile 

/       merchandise-ing 
'^^       messenger 
'^^       Methodisra-ist 

'^^      misfortune 

mistake' 

''    6 mistook' 


-<X 


^ 


Natural-ly 
neglectful 
r.fgligence-t 

never  thcless 
.notwithstand-ing 


f     nothing 

— ^     November 
V.  never 

\     Participat€-ed 

^  >    participation 

S\ particu  lar-1  y 

5_  passenger 

\        peculiar-ity-ly' 
\       pecuniary' 
J.     perform 

\y^  perpendicularly 

\j^  phonographer 

1  _^ phonographic 

plaintiff 
%     plenty' 

N      platform 

\       iwpular 
\o    postage 


practicable 
jtrojecl* 


prejudice' 
'X      privilege 
\      probable-y 


OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


t;^ 


\j^  proficient 
__L_P/ofit' 
"A.       property 

\  .  proportion 
V  prosperity 
'^y      protestant 

r      protested 
^-^  protesUmtism 
\         pnhlif.-ish 


\    publication 

^      punish-ment 


X 


Co 


-purpose 
_purposely 
Qualify 
)  qualificatiou 
[^quality' 
.quantity' 

— ^"^quarrelsome 
C quarter-ly 

cy^  Railway 


recover-ed 
reformed 
/VD  reformation 
reformer 
rcgular-ity-ly 


'relinquish-ed 
reluctaiice-t 
remark-able-ed 


represent-ed 
-^v)  representation 
/\)   representative 
republic-ish-ed 
republican 
/\    respected 
/^    responsiblc-ive 

/O      revelation' 
'  revolution' 

/'s^  Rev.  revenue 

(t       Satisfaction 
Z^^   satisfactory 

p         Savior 
\^     several 

_y     selfish 
^,_^     September 
0 — s^  somebody 
(5"N..^^  something 

(5"^^~^  sometime 
"^      somewhat' 


1  stranger 

>, —  subscribe 

\^Z>  subscription 

'^Sp  substantial 


V y  suflScien  t-ly 

/      suggcst-ed 
^     suggestion 
'N     superintend-ent 
No    surprise' 
\       system 
'—    Telcgraph-ic 
i — ^  temperance-ate 
<r\_/  testimony 
3-3     transaction 


transfer 


I 


transform 
J,       transportation 

Unconstitutional-ly 


^.^^    underhand-ed 
^   V  understand-stood 
0       uniform 

^^^.^  unimfKjrtant' 
unimproved' 

'V^  universally 

v_p    United  States 

^     watchful' 
whichever' 


L 


whatever' 

\^  whenever 

C/\^  wlie'rever 
t      whoever 


116                                             AMERICANS 

M AXIAL 

COMPLETE    LIST 

OF    WORD-SIGNS. 

VOWELS. 

CONSONANTS. 

■ 

a,>  an  i 

\ 

happy,'    hoi>e,2   put.^ 

. 

the* 

\ 

practice,'   principal-le.-' 

■ 

ah!i 

\ 

apply,'   jjeople.* 

• 

eh  ?  -^  aye  '     . 

\ 

happen,'  upon."''  opinion^ 

/ 
1 

and,i  (upward.)  ' 
P  ( in  phrases.  ) 

\ 

spoke,-  speak.'' 
spoken.* 

1 

but* 

\> 

possible-ly.' 

N 

ofi 

\ 

practiced,'  oppressed.' 

V 

to« 

N> 

surprise,*  express.* 

' 

should,'-   (upward.) 

% 

experience.* 

N 

alli 

^ 

part,'  opportunity,  2 

.  _v 

two,  -  too  * 

■n 

complete.* 

' 

awe,'  ousht.i 

^ 

spirit.* 

_  V^ 

who*  whom,  g  whose, 

\ 

by,'  be,'-  to-be.' 

1 

0,'  oh,'  owe;-      before.''' 

X 

remeinber-ed,'-     member,* 
number.-' 

' 

1,1  high,'  aye.i 

\ 

belong,'   able,*  believe.* 

■ 

how« 

\ 

combine,'    been.- 

c 

we,i(and    '     in  phrases.) 

^ 

behalf.i  above.  2 

c 

with* 

subject,*   \3  subjection.* 

> 

what, 

\) 

objection.* 

■> 

would  2 

^ 

behindf'  bound.* 

'^ 

beyond  ' 

1 

1 

r 
J 

at,'  it,*  out.» 

/^ 

you  ^ 

try,*  true,*  truth. 3 

\J 

yet'      . 

tell,*  till,*  until.-"* 

year* 

contain.* 

OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 


117^ 


1 


V 

I 

J 
L 


/^ 


/ 
/ 


satisfy. 1  city."^ 

temptation. ■•' 

itself,'  it  is,"^  advertise,  i 

circumstantial.^ 

circumstance. 2 

strong,'  strength.^ 

tried,'  toward,'!  treut-ed.3 

told.-^ 

had,'  dollar,  1  do.  2 

Dr.'  dear.'-'  during. •' 

deliver-y.2 

deliverance.* 

does.* 

distinct.  3 

divine,'   differ-ent-enee.' 

done,*''  down.3 

consider,'^     1  considered.* 

consideration. - 

did,»  doiibt-ed.^' 

hadn't,'     don't.-'    did  n't.' 

condition,'  addition. - 

much,'   which,'-'  each.' 

sufdi.* 

child,'  y     children.'^ 

chair,*  cheer.-' 

chief,  wliifhevcr. 

lurtjc,'  advantage.* 

larger,'  danger.'- 


o. 


largely.' 

general-ly,'^  join,' 

Jehovah  '•'. 

generation. 
"  gentleman,'    -men."'' 
I  re'.igious-ly.'- 

can,*  come,*  country.  2 

Christian,!  care,*  cure.-' 

call,!  coal,*  cool.' 

equal-Iy.^ 

question,*      ^  rover. 

describe,'  Si-rijjture.* 

description.* 

act,!  could.* 

because,!  comes,*  accuse. •* 

called,!   difficult-y.' 

aceord-ing,!  court,* 

cannot,'  kind,'  county.* 

quite  ! 

go,'  ago,'  give-n.^ 

degree,*  grew.' 

glory  * 

began,!  again,*  Ijegin.' 

altogether,'  together.* 

govern-or.* 

signify.* 

significance.* 

signification.* 


118 

AMERICAN 

MANUAL 

^ 

— 

God,i  good,' 

c 

those,'-  this,''  these.' 

c— 

great,'*  agreed.* 

G 

themselves,''  this-is.^ 

glad,i  gold.2 

( 

that,'  without.' 

V. 

half,'  for,2   if.' 

) 

saw,'  so,''  us,'-!  see.' 

V 

form',   from, 2  free.** 

T 

sat,'  sight,'  set,*  sit.' 

^ 

follow-ing,i  full.2 

o 

as,'  is.2  alsoo  has,'  his.* 

V. 

fine,'  often,2  ph(yiography.* 

) 

was,*  ease-j'.' 

v.. 

formation. 2 

J 

shall,*  show,*  she.' 

Vo 

find,'  found. '^ 

J 

sure.* 

v^ 

fast,'  first.2 

J 

shine,'  shown.* 

V. 

fact,'  after,'  future.^ 

') 

short,'  shirt.* 

<l 

offered,'  effort. * 

J 

usual-ly.'-* 

<.. 

friend,'^  frequent -ly.^ 

J 

pleasure. ■- 

I. 

have,'  very ,2  view. ^ 

'' 

law,'  will,^  allow.3 

over,'  every ,'^  however.' 

r" 

less,*  lose.' 

^ 

value,*  evil. 3 

r 

line,'  alone.* 

V. 

heaven,-'  evening.' 

c 

while,'  well.* 

^ 

several  .2 

r 

light,'  let.* 

■  ( 

thank,'  think,^  thousand. s 

r 

learn. 2 

( 

thought.' 

c 

learnt.* 

■) 

throw,'''  three,''  through.'' 

"^ 

Of,'  lu>r,2  oiir,  hour'. 

c 

authorize.' 

^ 

hoio.'!  hoar..'? 

c 

authority.' 

^ 

herself.* 

•) 

third.'^ 

y 

are* 

( 

though,'  they,'^  theni.'^ 

^ 

arise,'  arose,"''  hours,' 

(' 

other,2  either.' 

-^ 

ourselves.'* 

) 

their,  there. '^ 

y 

rise,'  rouse.' 

U- 

than,'  then,"''  within.^ 

■^ 

sir,''  sour.' 

J 

OF   PHONOGKAPHY. 


119 


./ 


art.' 

heart,'  hard.' 

world, '•*  ruled. ^ 

were,2  where. ' 

rely,'  real,^  rule.' 

refer-ence.2 

writer,'  rather. ^ 

my,'  may,-    rae.'-^  time.' 

him,  2 


'^~i>\ 


myself,'  ^     b  himself.'^ 
^   Mrs.    ''"^v  IMissef". 
some,2  siniilar-ity.3 

I  more,'  Mr.^ 

^     I 
-'     almost,'  most,- missed.^ 

C~^  ,  mine,'  man,'  men.'^ 

-■^   j  mind,'  amount,^ 

- —    I  might,'  met. 2 

^^      mad,'  made.2 

^"^     iiii|iortant-anee,'  improve- 

Iment.''' 
^      "• .  sample,'  simple. - 

^""^    impossible,'  improvements. - 

' — ' ;  on,^  any,'  in,^  no.'-'  know.2 

^^     nor,'  honor,'  near.- 

'"-—'  I  when,'  one.'- 

*^~— ^   wlienee,'  onoe.^ 

"  honest,'  next.'' 

known,!  none, ^  union.s 

^ — ^;  influence,    knows. - 


r 

r 

6 

/ 


seen, 2  soon.* 

nation.'^ 

notion,! 

hand,'  end,-  under.- 

not,'   night,'  nature.'^ 

sent,''^  cent.'- 

send,2  sound.* 

want,'    went. 2 

long,'  language,'  thing. 2 

.single-ular.3 

why,'  waj',  awaj',^  weigh. 

wear ,2  aware. 

warning,'  jvorn,^ 

wane.* 

wind,'  wound.* 

wide,'  weighed.' 

ward,'  word.'- 

your.      (^     yifld. 

yours,"''  use,"^ yourself.* 

yourselves.' 

Ohio,'  he.2 

or      )  house.' 

from   their,'  further.' 

latter,'  letter.^ 

order,' 

matter,'  mother. 2 

another,^   neither*. 

anger,'  longer.' 


120  AMERICAN   MANUAL 


WRITING  EXERCISE  ON    IMPROVEMENT. 

The  following,  in  the  construction  of  sentences  for  the  employment 
of  all  the  word-signs,  was  furnished  for  an  early  edition  of  Phonog- 
raphy by  the  Rev.  .John  Hope,  an  English  clergyman.  It  should  be 
written  and  re-written,  until  every  word  can  be  put  upon  paper 
without  liesitation.  The  words  connected  by  hyphens  should  be 
written  as  phrases,  without  lifting  the  pen. 

Establislinients  for  iinprovonient  antl-for  knowledge  in- 
general,  ai^  important  things  in-a  government;  and  the  more 
so  where  it-re  usual  with-them  to  acknowledge  good  principles. 
A-Phonographic  organization  in  particular,  is-an  ininiedjate 
advantage  to-every  gentleman,  lady,  or  child,  who  is-a  mein- 
ber  of-it,  and  to  all.  According  to  general  ojjinion.  Phonog- 
raphy is-a  subject  we  could,  and  should  have  pleasure  in; 
without  it,  language  is-not  quite  what  it-should-be— a  remark 
in-which  there-is  great  truth,  and  to-which  I-think-there  can- 
be  no  objection.  Again,  every  one  who-has  tlK>ughts  which- 
are  dear  to-him,  or  important  to-the  world,  is  ealled-upon  to- 
care  for-them  and  improve  them,  to-the  full,  when-he-has 
opportunity.  How,  or  on  what  ]  riii(  iple  can-we  be  good 
without  improvement.  Rcnienilx  r,  tliat-it-is  thought  that 
evi'ry  thing  is-an  object  of-importauce  that  comes  under-it ; 
and,  beyond  all,  that-the  sure  word  of  God  was  given 
for  improvement.  8hoiild  there-l)e  difficulties  in-the-way  of- 
your  improvement,  and  of-the  subjection  of-your  nature  to 
God's  truth,  then  ]  call-upon  you,  while  you-can  improve,  to- 
do-80.  After  what  I-have  told-you,  are-there  yet  objections 
to-it?  Were  there,  an  account  of-them  would  already  have- 
been  given,  (treat  and  good  things  can-not  come  together 
without  improvement.  But  should  I-be-told  that-it  might- 
have-been  s<),  from  what  I  know  of-the  friendly  spirit  of-all, 
I  tell-you-the  truth  is-as  I-have  given  it,  nor  can-you  object 
to-it.  In-short,  gentlemen  and  ladies,  you  ought-to  establish 
it  a.s-your  first  principle,  that-you  will  not  give  uj);  but-as 
you-have  opportunity,  why  not  do  ail-that  can-be-done 
towards  improvement  in  every-thing  in-this-world?  And 
should  it-l>e  done  well,  you-will  give  i>leasure  not  to-me  alone, 
but  to  all,         r- 


3. 


OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


121 


A. 


^ 


s^ 


^  <rv 


)   c^b_>^   c    X  ~7  -\_ 


I  ^^.  ^-^  ^,  ^  M 


V 


Co 


V 


c  / 


v^-=-H 


c_    = 


^^  ^  ^'\,'  yX'") 


\^_^-._S^ 


1  1  v^."^ 


^   ,    o    "^ 


> 


>       V—  /^      C\     y      A    ^ 


^ 


\      -       (^ 


-xU 


\N-     ( 


-? 9 


J^ 


■^ 


)  —   '^ 


W^ 


t 


>JO     /^w      N-"       1.     C      S       „.(r 


t 


-> 


^  _ 


-  >^  ^  —  ^  (^ 


4^^kJ,^l 


V '    =*     c^   <\    \     "^        ^ 


i-Lo  v_L^— "\^x^^./^ 


^. .  <  ij  r  ^  ^,  ^--\ 


^  ^  n 


J  ^,  y^—  j> 


t^  -^^v 


A. 


r" 


"tr^^^^-V 


122  AMERICAN   MANUAL 

PHRASEOGRAPHY, 

Phonographers  who  look  forward  to  reporting,  either  pro- 
fessionally or  for  their  own  satisfaction,  should  at  once  begin 
to  cultivate  reporting  habits,  by  the  use  of  phraseography, 
that  is,  the  running  of  words  together  without  lifting  the  pen. 
This  principle  was  introduced  in  §58,  where  the  pupil  was 
taught  to  write  oj'-the,  to-tJie,  in-a,for-a,  if-he,  lie-nuty,  etc.  It 
is  applied  to  tiie  writing  of  all  words  of  frequent  occurrence, 
and  that  generally  come  together  in  clauses  or  phrases;  as 
"^  I-have,  f~  yoa-w'dl,  '—^  as-good-as,  ^  as-well-as, 
I there-can-he,     "^^^^^^p    there-ioere-^nany-things. 

186.  In  order  to  keep  phrases  from  running  too  far  below 
the  line,  it  is  allowable  to  abbreviate  word-signs,  and  some- 
times entirely  change  their  representation;  thus  \  been  is 
represented  by  the  hook  alone  in  such  pnrases  as:  A^  I-have- 
been, '\       yon-have-been,  )    tJicir-Jiaiv-been;  (^  t/uiniareiyTeiiented 

^  •  ^^  ^ 

])y    the   hook   alone,  in     \/^  better-than,  ^.^^^  (jrmter-than; 

and       in  change  to  )  2,   in  such  phrases  as   )  {z-t)  as-it, 

as-it-was,    )     is-ii-nof;    and      aU     is  represented  by 

the   /-hook  upon  the  previous  word,  as :    \    by  alf,    \  ai  nil, 

C     for  all,   ^ — ^  on  all. 

187.  In  such  phrases  as  U^7-/'."(-s.</^/,  Q_J^«.s-.sy>o/<-«.s',  the  double 

circle  indicates  the  repeating  of  a,  after  is  and  as,  in  the  follow- 
ing word.      The  loop  <^  str,  represents  as-tliere,^  is-t/irre.'^ 

188.  The  first  word  in  a  phrase  must  always  be  written  in  its 
own  proper  position,  that  is,  in  the  first,  second  or  third 
position,    with    reference    to     the    line    of    writing;     thus: 

^  can-be,  — ^^^  co»/(/-no/-6e,  ^\  of-onr.  After  the  first 
word  is  written,  however,  the  succeeding  words  mav  be  writ- 


)  is-it,   \ 


OF    PHONOGRAPHY,  123 


ten  out  of  position ;  as  « you-can,  {       it-is-not,  ^\^   I-have- 

had.  A  first-position  word-sign,  in  a  phrase,  may  be 'slightly 
raised  or  lowered,  to  indicate  the  position,  (and  the  word)  of 
the  next  sign;  thus:     |  I-Ivud,  vi  I-do ;  ^   I hud-not,s»   I-did-not. 

DOUBLE-LENGTH  CURVES. 
189.    The  double-length   curved   strokes,    which  represent 
the  addition  of  tr  or  thr  to  the  single-length  strokes,  with  the 
»-circle  and   /i-liook  added,  aiibrd  a  useful    series  of  phrases: 

V  for-their,    \ ^    for-there-is,    V  for-their-owii. 

V  if-their,        \         if-there-is,    V       if-their-own. 

V^       from-there,  V         from-their-own,    \^^    farther-than. 
\^^   have-their,    ^      have-there-been,   {or,  own.) 
y^       over-there,    \^^     over  their  own. 

think-there,   (     think-there  is,    (     think-their-own. 


(  though-there,     (  though-there-is,  (  th'-other-( 
'    saw-their,        saw-their-own;  see-their.own. 
I   was-there,    J   was-their-own. 

(      lighter-than ;    later-than;    lay-their-owu. 

b     siigliter-than ;   saltier-than. 

) 
^  show-their,  wish-their,  shall-there. 

~^    whiter,    "^    whiter-than,  widcr-tlian. 

^^—^   may-there,    ,-— x  may-tlieir-own. 

Q — ^x    some-other,   ^ — -^     some-other-one. 

^ — ^  another,    '    _J^    anotlier-one;    neither-one. 

'^> — y   longer,    ^ ^  longer-than;  youtiger-than. 


_„ 

124  AMERICAN   MANUAL 


190.  In  such  plirases  as  if-thererart,  though-there-are,  know- 
there-are,  the  curved  stroke  is  written  treble-length,  to  indi- 
cate the  addition  of  are. 

191.  Some  writers  hold  that  the  «-hook  should  be  rend  be- 
fore the  addition  of  tr  and  thr;  thus :  v^  fctinter,  or  jan- 
their,  V^  vender,  ^ — ^  knoirn-thelr,  J  shown-fheir.  But 
as  in  V^  ffr,  v_^-^  uthr^  etc.,  the  tr  and  t/ir  are  represented 
by  the  additional  length  of  the  curves,  we  hold  that  it  is 
philosophical,  when  the  M-liook  is  added,  to  add  the  sound  of 
the  hook  to  the   tr,  and  thr,    and   read  the   signs  V        ftr-ii, 

■^ ^  nthr-n,  etc.     To  do  otherwise,  would  take  from  us  most 

of   the  above  very  frequent  and  useful  phrases,  and  we  would 
gain   little   to   compare  with  their  loss. 

192.  Doubling  the  length  of  straight  strokes,  with  an 
«-hook,  for  the  addition  of  tr  and  thr,  aii\bit-t/ir,  -  kit-thr, 
as  practiced  by  some  writers,  is  unphilosophical  and  objec- 
tionable, except  in  jjhrases. 

193.  Omis-siox  of  "Of-thf.."— The  frequently  recurring 
phrase  "o/-M<^'  is  significantly  represented  by  writing  the 
words  between  which  it  occurs  near  to  each  other,  thus  show- 
ing   by  their  proximity  that  the  one  is    of  the  other;    as: 

(     \^  X      lore  of  the  beautifnly  %S\__  subject  of  the  work. 

194.  Omissiox  of  "To." — Many  American  writers  omit  the 
word  to  nearly  altogether,  and  indicate  that  it  is  to  be  read 
b\'  beginning  the  following  word  below  the  line  of  writing, 
that  is  below  where  to  would  be  placed  if  it  were  writ- 
ten; thus:  X  to-be,  I  to 'to,  y^  to  write.  It  has  Jiever 
received  the  sanction  of  the  author  of  Phonography,  (except 
in  the  phrase  tube,  in  wliich  it  is  impossible  to  make  an  angle 
between  to  and  l>e,)  and  is  not  used  by  the  best  Kntrlish  re- 
porters.    There    is  very  little  gain  in    it.  and    much   loss   in 


OF    THOXOGRAPHY.  125 

many  words,  by  the  pen   being  carried  so  far  beloAv  the  line. 

195.  The  words  ihe,  a,  by,  after,  etc.,  and  occasional  syllables, 
are  omitted,  for  the  sake  of  making  easy  phrases;  thus: 
^^~-<^  in-thc-worhl,  \^^_  for-the-sake-of,  V  for-instance, 
W  daif-by-chiy,  l<  dny-nffer-day,  ||  from  day  to-day, '"^^^  from- 
t'uiir-to-t'une. 

196.  HooKi.vG  OF  Dash  WoRD-Si(iNs.— In  the  "Hand- 
Book  of  Phonography,"  by  Andrew  J.  Graham,  a  scheme  of 
writing  the  small  hooks  to  all  the  dash  word-signs,  is  pre- 
sented.    They   are  used  to   form   phrases;     thus:    "^    of    all, 

^  to-all,  I"  but-all,  /'  should-all;  ^  of-our,  \  to-onr,  t  but-our, 
9  should-our,  ^  to-have,  u  but-have,  d  should-have,  /^  and- 
kave,  ^ I-Imve^  all-have,^ ought-to-have,  6  ivho-have; ^ who-will, 
Sic,  &c.  Other  signs,  of  course,  are  attached  to  these  to 
represent  additional  words  in  longer  phrases;  as:  r  of-all- 
these,  ^N^  cf-our-pr'mciples,  \  ought-to-have-been.  The  use  of 
this  whole  scheme  cannot  be  recommended ;  the  forms  re- 
<iuire  too  much  care  in  writing,  to  be  legible,  and  where  the 
alphabetic  signs  will  join  together  they  may  be  more  freely 
written,  and  will  not  be  confounded  with  the  hooked  half- 
length  strokes.  A  few  of  them,  such  as  ^  of-<dl,  ^  to-all, 
(should-have,  l  but-hnve,  aught-to-have,  and  ^  I-have,  may 
sometimes  be  used  to  advantage. 

The  foregoing  constitute  the  leading  principles  governing 
the  formation  of  phraseograms.  There  is  scarcely  any  limit 
to  the  extent  to  which  they  may  be  used.  On  the  following 
pages  we  give  a  list  nf  those  generally  employed  in  ordinary 
writing.  They  should  be  studied  and  copied  in  connection 
with  the  key;  then  read  without  the  aid  of  the  key,  by  cov- 
ering with  a  strip  of  paper;  and  finally  you  should  write 
them,  over  and  over  again,  by  having  some  one  read  them 
ak.ud  to  you,  until  you  can  form  them  without  hesitation. 


126 


AMERICAN   MANUAL 


"about  which  vmi  arc 


^-^      A  few  words 
r         a  great  deal 
a  ifihurt  time 
X^-> —    able  to  make 
No — about  such 

y about  which  it  is  not 

b all  that  is 

V) all  that  is  ."aid 

vv all  that  has  been 

__._(/. all  that  you 

L and  all  that 

__jv    ._and  as  if  there 

.^. and  as  it  is  not 

— (< and  as  to  that 

A-- 


LIST  OF  COMMON  PHRASES. 


_and  is  not 


/ and  though  there  i? 


and  whenever  there  is 

..^S^j?--— ad  far  as  possible. 
o— o       as  great  as 

g^_,o  as  long  as 

'^— ^  as  soon  as  possible 

'^-vv  as  it  could  not  bo 

\ — V  as  it  mav  be 


^ ■ 


,s  it  was 


J 


V 


X/^ 


at  all  times 
at  once 

at  hand. 

at  their  own  expense 
at  the  same  time 
because  it  is 
l)ecause  of  its 
because  they  were 
by  all  means 
by  means  of 
by  their  own 
Can  it  be 

can  there  bo 
can  there  not  be 

could  not  be 
Do  you  mean 
do  their  duty 
does  not  thi.s 
did  you  give  them 
pjvcry  person 
every  one 
everything  else 
For  my  part 
for  the  purpose 
for  this  reason 


OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


127 


(icntleiucn  ipf  the  jury- 
give  me  the 
give  them  the 
give  their  time 
give  their  attention 
Had  there  been 
had  there  not  been 
he  can  be 
be  can  not  be 
he  could  not  have  been 
he  ha.«  been  there 
be  has  not  been 
he  would  not  have  been 
how  are  you 
hoiv  could  you 
how  many  of  them 

I  admit 

I  am  glad 

I  am  sure  of  it 

I  am  inclined  to  think 

I  am  very  glad 

I  believe  that 

I  do  not  know 

I  do  not  think 

I  expect 

•  I  fear  you  Avill  have 


\A — y\ 

I 

-J' 


s- 


have  been 

have  not  been 

have  said 

have  their  own 

hope  you  are  satisfied 

hope  you  will  have 

know  they  will 

may  as  well 

may  be  told 

may  not  be  there 

might  not  be 

must  be 

never 

shall  bo 

think  it  is  impossible 

think  there  is 

will  be  sure 

will  not  be  there 

wish  there 

ever  there  is 

ever  you  are 

it  be 

it  be  not 

it  is  not 

it  is  said 

there  is  to  be 


128 


AMERICAN    MANUAL 


6 


^ 
^-^ 


"1_ 

Q>'- 

--^ 


n-all  parts 

n  all  re!Ji>ects 

11  as  much  as 

n  consequence 

n  my  oj/inion 

n  reference 

n  regard 

n  relation 

n  respect 

n  the  first  place 

n  the  next  place 

n  the  second  place 

n  this  country  ■ 

n  your  place 

n  your  own 

s  not 

s  this  not 

s  it  not 

s  it  not  better 

s  it  not  possible 

t  could  not  be 

t  has  been 

t  is  impossible 

t  is  most  important  that 

t  is  my  opinion 

t  is  necessary  that 


P  it  is  said  that 

V     _,  it  is  well  known 

J—^— ^  it  seems  to  me 

p 

L  it  will  be  said 

<^  it  will  not  be 

^  it  would  not  be 

p~^  Just  as  good  as 

''C  just  been 

(^^  just  as  well  as 

(J°  Ladies  and  gentlemen 

I  less  than 

^0  let  us  be  sure 

/  JSIanner  in  which 

O  many  circumstances 

V  many  think 

C,  may  not  have  been 

V_  might  not  have 

/  Mr.  Chairman 


A 


Ir.  President 
more  and  more 
most  likely 
much  more 
^-j    must  have  been 
,  my  dear  brother 
my  dear  friend 
my  dear  sir 


OF    PHONOGRAPHY. 


129 


^t^ 


Neither  of  them 

New  York  City 

no  such  thing 

not  only 

Of  course  it  is 

of  course  it  must  be 

of  which 

of  which  it  might  be 

of  great  advantage 

of  some  kind 

of  those  who  are 

of  which  you  are 

on  account  of 

on  the  contrary 

on  their  part 

on  this  account 

on  this  side 

on  this  occasion 

on  the  one  liand 

ought  not  to  think 

ought  not  to  have 

ought  to  be  done 

out  of  tlic  way 

over  and  over 

Peculiar  circumstances 

point  of  view 


Quite  likely 

quite  certain 

Railroad 

railroad  station 

railway 

rather  be 

rather  give 

rather  have 

render  themselves 

reporting  stj'le 

Seems  to  be 

Senate  of  the  U.  S. 

shall  be 

shall  not  bo 

shall  have 
-should  be  able 
-should  not  be 

-should  have  been 
so  as  to  be 

so  as  to  give 
so  that  you  may 
so  there  may  bo 
something  has  been 
such  a  man 
such  as  are 
such  as  can 


130 


AMERICAN   MANLAL 


That  has  been 
hat  it  is 

hat  is  not  necessary 
hat  it  may  be 
hat  there  are 
hat  which  has  been 
hat  you  are 
here  can  be 
herefore  you  will 
here  has  been 
here  is  another 
here  is  no  objection 
here  must  always  be 
here  seems  to  be 
hey  are  rather 
hey  may  as  well 
hey  may  not  be 
hey  will  most  likely 
his  is  a  matter 
his  is  not 
his  question 
hose  who  are 
hose  who  have 
o  be  sure 
o  be  there 
o  be  worthy 


X-_ 

t 

u 


^ 


to  do  something 

to  some  extent 

to  which  you  are 

Was  it 

was  not 

was  there  not 

we  do  not  know 

we  did  not  know 

we  did  not  think 

we  have  been 

we  think  there  may  be 

we  are  not 

we  are  rather 

we  are  ready 

we  may  be 

we  might  not  be 

we  were 

we  were  there 

we  will  be 

we  will  be  sure 

we  will  try 

were  I 

were  they 

were  there  not 

were  we 

were  you 


OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


131 


d// 


<: 


where  are  they 

where  are  we 

where  can  it 

where  will  they 

where  shall 

what  were  you 

what  can  be 

what  cannot  be 

what  shall  be 
V_^    when  ever  you 
y^      whenever  there  is 

when  there  is 

when  there  has  been 

when  we  have 

when  we  were 

which  are 
/^      which  are  now 

l_ which  can  be 

oC  which  has  been 

.../-...      which  it  is  not 
^  which  would  have  been 

^^         which  may  not  be 
X which  you  could 


r 


< 


which  will  be 
'■—^  which  will  make 

X  which  will  not  be 


9 


S 

r 


5 


►^ 


while  there  is 
while  we  aro 
while  you  are 
who  are 
who  were 
who  can  be 
who  has  been 
who  have  been 
who  is  it 
who  was  it 
who  will  not  be 
who  would  not  be 
will  be  found 
will  you  be 

.with  which 

.with  which  there 
with  me 

with  reference  to 
with  respect  to 
would  become 
would  have  been 
You  are 
you  are  not 
you  will  be  sure 
you  must  be 
you  must  not  be 


132  AMERICAN   MANUAL 


CONCERNING.  CONVERSATION. 

For  a  Key  to  this  article,  see  following  opposite  pages. 


r     (    ^^     ^     \    ^      ^      /'     (^      ^    ^       .     y 


i- "  ^  -%  ^  ^ 


V>-» 


OF   PHONOGRAPHY.  133 


CO^'CER^ING  CONVERSATION. 

BY    Die    DE   LA    ROCHFOUCAULD. 

To  be  v:fitten  in  Shorthand,  and  Compared  with  the  Opposite  Page. 

1.  The  reason  why  so  few  jwrsons  are  agreeable  in  conver- 
sation is,  that  each  thinks  more  of  what  he  desires  to  say,  than 
of  what  others  say,  and  that  we  make  bad  listenere  when  we 
want  to  speak. 

2.  Yet  it  is  necessary  to  listen  to  those  who  talk ;  we  should 
give  them  the  time  they  want,  and  let  them  say  even  senseless 
things. 

3.  Never  contradict  or  interrupt  them;  on  the  contrary, 
we  should  enter  into  their  mind  and  taste,  illustrate  their 
meaning,  praise  anything  they  say  that  deserves  praise,  and  let 
them  see  we  praise  more  from  our  choice  than  from  agreement 
with  them. 

4.  To  please  others  we  should  talk  on  subjects  they  like, 
and  that  interest  them :  avoid  disputes  upon  indifferent 
matters,  seldom  ask  questions,  and  never  let  them  see  that 
we  pretend  to  be  better  informed  than  they  are. 

5.  We  should  talk  in  a  more  or  less  serious  manner,  and 
ujion  more  or  less  abstruse  subjects,  according  to  the  temjier 
and  understanding  of  the  persons  we  talk  with,  and  readily 
give  them  the  advantage  of  deciding  without  obliging  them 
to  answer  when  they  are  not  anxious  to  talk. 

fi.  After  having  in  this  way  fulfilled  the  dutjes  of  polite- 
ness, we  can  speak  our  opinions  to  our  listeners  when  we  find 
an    opportunity  without  a  sign  of  presumption. 


134 


AMERICAN  MANUAL 


CONCERNING  CONVERSATION,  CONTINUED 

7    V  ^    -^ 


^    /  -^^  "Vo   ii.v     / 


^ 


^ 


•^         o      ^      ^         (^-     ^-^        / 


^=T 


^ 


^ 


_     V-    -P 


n.  :^   y-  ^^. 


tT^ 


1)^  ^  n^  -J  ^-^  ^ 


7.  C^^T^r>^v 


•^ ^ 


1     V^   1 


^ 


i     L 


t. 


^ 


io. 


^  )• 


^ 


\  c 


<;_/ 


^ 


.V>^.      ";? 


ii. 


^q.^9  -^  ^  ^ 


a^     ^      \ 


lOu. 


L 


^ 

x^^- 


c 


^ 


6^-V 


L        f 


/^-\ 


i3. 


A^ 


( -^ 


OF  PHOXOCJRAPHY.  13' 


CONCERNING   CONVERSATION,  CONTINUKD. 

7.  Above  all  things  we  should  avoid  often  talking  of  our- 
selves and  giving  ourselves  as  an  example ;  nothing  is  more 
tiresome  than  a  man  who  quotes  himself  for  everything. 

S.  We  can  not  give  too  great  study  to  lind  out  the  manner 
and  the  capacity  of  those  with  whom  we  talk,  so  as  to  join  in 
the  conversation  of  those  who  have  more  than  ourselves,  with- 
out hurting  by  this  preference  the  wishes  or  interests  of  others. 

9.  Then  we  should  modestly  use  all  the  modes  above  men- 
tioned to  show  our  thoughts  to  them,  and  make  them,  if  j)ossi- 
ble,  believe  that  we  take  our  ideas  from  them. 

10.  We  should  never  say  anything  with  an  air  of  authority, 
nor  show  any  superiority  of  mind. 

11.  We  should  avoid  far-fetched  expressions,  expressions 
hard  or  forced,  and  never  let  the  words  be  grander  than  the 
matter. 

12.  It  is  not  wrong  to  retain  our  opinions  if  they  are  rea- 
sonable, but  we  should  yield  to  reason  wherever  she  appears, 
and  from  whatever  side  she  comes. 

13.  Reason  alone  .should  govern  our  opinions;  we  should 
follow  her  without  opposing  the  opinions  of  others,  and  with- 
out seeming  to  ignore  what  they  saj'. 


^^136 


AMERICAN    MANL'AL 


CONCERNING  CONVERSATION,  CONTINUED. 


^^^-v 


-     -^^       s       ^ 


ST" 


_Vi^ 


IS.  ^^"^    .<1  V-    I 


""S—Y 


'  ^  -  ''f,  S 


U- 


^ 


r~   ^    c 


^t^ 


Al 


^-t 


\  ^  ^  ^ 


-^^v-^ 


-\     c^     . 


zr 


1^ 


jg:   <L     "^^  ;     r^    I 


K 


^ 


K.    - 


s^ 


i     I 


■^ 


4 


U,  !)   c^,0   ^^    -   O- 


/- 


v^  ^ 


^ 


*^    \  V     /    /^       v>  ,    L_ 


/ 


K_s> 


a.  ^ 


^ 


(? 


w 


OF  PHONOGRAPHY.  137 


CONCERNING   CONVnCRSATlON,  CONTINUED. 

14.  It  is  dangerous  to  seek  to  be  always  the  leader  of  the 
conversation,  and  to  pusli  a  good  argument  too  hard,  wlien  we 
liave  found  one. 

15.  Civility  often  hides  half  its  understanding,  and  when 
it  meets  with  an  opinionated  man  who  defends  the  bad  side, 
spares  him  the  disgrace  of  giving  way. 

1().  We  are  sure  to  displease  when  we  speak  too  long  and 
too  often  of  one  subject,  and  when  we  try  to  turn  the  conversa- 
satioii  upon  subjects  tliat  we  think  more  instructive  than  others. 

17.  We  should  enter  indifferently  ujwn  every  subject  that 
is  agreealjle  to  others,  stoppiiij'  where  they  wish,  and  avoiding 
all  they  do  not  agree  with. 

IS.  Every  kind  of  conversation,  however  witty  it  may  be, 
is  not*  ecjually  fitted  for  all  clever  persons;  we  should  select 
what  is  to  their  taste  and  suitable  to  their  condition,  their  sex, 
their  talents,  and  also  choose  the  time  to  say  it. 

19.  We  should  observe  the  place,  the  occasion,  the  temper, 
in  which  we  tind  the  person  who  listens  tons,  for  if  .there  is 
much  art  in  si)eaking  to  the  purpose,  there  is  no  less  in  know- 
ing when  to  be  silent. 

2<».  There  is  an  elo<iuent  silence  which  serves  to  aj)prove 
or  to   condemn;   there  is  a  silence  of  discretion  and  of  respect. 


138 


AMEBUAX   MANUAL 


CONX'ERNING  CONVERSATION,  CONCLUDED. 


^ 


-^ 


^.^ 


JL 


m. 


^^^  '  -^  -)  .    \o  ^ 


^     o  .  3    •'^  A  .     /    L    ^     ^    ^ 


C    v> 


L_L 


as.  . 


^Vv    ^    c    dv 


4- 


^  = 


^ 


/  ^    c 


:i 


o^ ) 


^  ^  r  1  X   ^y^  N  ^  c 


4t 


M.  v^  "  1    ^    "^  ^^ 


c     G     o 


^ 


A 


^     y 


^a:  L 


\ 


^  -^  _ 


C:    C   ^^ 


T 


^     c   r  ^ 


OF  PHOXOGRAPHY.  139 


COXOERMNG  CONVERSATION,  CONCLUDED, 

21.  Ill  a  word  there  is  a  tone,  an  air,  a  manner,  which 
render  everything  in  conversation  agreeable  or  disagreeable, 
refined  or  vulgar. 

22.  One  of  the  reasons  that  we  find  so  few  persons  rational 
and  ugreeal)le  in  conversation  is,  there  is  hardly  a  person  who 
does  not  think  more  of  what  he  wants  to  say  than  of  his 
answer  to  what  is  said. 

23.  The  most  clever  and  polite  are  content  with  only 
seeming  attentive,  while  we  perceive  in  their  mind  and  eyes 
that  at  the  very  time  they  are  wandering  from  what  is  said 
and  desire  to  return  to  what  they  want  to  say. 

24.  Instead  of  considering  that  the  worst  way  to  persuade 
or  please  others  is  to  try  thus  strongly  to  please  ourselves,  and 
that  to  listen  well  and  to  answer  well  arc  some  of  the  greatest 
charms  we  can  have  in  conversation. 

25.  It  is  oftener  by  the  estimation  of  our  own  feelings 
that  we  exaggerate  the  good  <iualities  of  others  than  by 
their  merit,  and  when  we  praise  them  we  wish  to  attract 
their  praise. 

2().  But  it  is  given  to  few  persons  to  keep  this  secret  well. 
Those  who  lay  down  rules  too  often  break  them,  and  the  safest 
we  are  able  to  give  is,  to  listen  much,  to  speak  little,  and  tossy 
nothing  that  will  ever  give  ground  for  regret. 


140  AMERICAN    MANUAL 


EXERCISE  ON  CONTRACTED  WORDS. 

1.  Students  should-now  Ije  abundantly  able  to-write-the 
following  disconnected  sentences:  I-beg  (to)  acknowledge-tlie 
receipt  ol'-your-letter,  which  would-have-been  acknowledged 
earlier  but-that  I-have-been  too  busy  (to)  give-it  attention. 
I-wish  (to)  say  that  shorthand  is  advantageous  even  to-an 
advertiser,  if-he  wishes  (to)  advertise  his  busines.s,  and  almost 
any-person  can-learn  it.  A  large-number  *of-my  acquaintances 
are  studying  it  already,  and-they-do-not  expect  much  trouble 
in  mastering  it.     Ls  any-body  astonished  at-this  statement? 

2.  Nobody  need  apprehend  anything  .serious  will  result 
frora-the  appointment  of-a  new  postmaster.  Any-one  may 
comprehend-the  construction  of-such  language.  The  banker 
went  into  bankruptcy  because-he  could-not  become-a  mill- 
ionaire. The  re-see  ms-to-be  some  confidential  correspondence 
going-on  between-the  bankrupt  and-broker.  Most  members 
of-Congress  thiuk-they-are  capable  ot-giving  advice  (to-the) 
President.  The  captain  of-our  company  in-the  late  war  was- 
a  Catholic,  and-he  gave-me-a  certificate  of  good  character. 
Constant  change  has  characterized  his  conduct  under-all- 
circumstances.  The  commercial  customs  of-all  civilized  j)eo- 
ple  arc  well  established,  and-not  difficult  (to)  comprehend. 

3.  Circumstantial-evidence  should-uot  convict  a-citizen  of- 
murder  in-the  first  degree.  He-will-not  cross-exam ine-the  wit- 
ness until  December.  It-is-said-the  defendant  is-a  Democrat, 
but-the  jury  is-not  democratic.  He-tried  (to)  describe-the 
destruction  of-a  city,  but-his  descrijition  was  quite  deficient 
and  faulty  in  delivery.  You-should-not  determine  (to)  de- 
velope  one  faculty  (to-the)  disadvantage  of  another. 

4.  For-the-amount  herewith  enclosed,  please-forward  goods 
heretofore  ordered  per-exprcs.s.  I-have  expresr^ly  provided 
that-the  expressage  shall-be  paid  promptly.  Everybody  is 
considerably  influenced  by-the  information  obtained  from 
tlie  newspapers.  Daily  intelligence  of-this-kind  is  interest- 
ing, while  it  also  affords  instruction.     Great  disappointment 


OF   PHONOGRAPHY.  14 


I^ 


followed  his  discharge  from-the  establishment.  The  distin- 
guished speaker  is  certainly  quite  efficient  in-his  line  of- 
argument;  and-he  will  no-doubt  make-an  impression  npon- 
the  convention,  especially  if  anything  essentially  new  comes- 
up.  Establishments  for  education  are  examples  of-progress 
and  improvement.  Heretofore  this  has-not  always-been  con- 
sidered indispensable,  but  hereafter  it-will-be. 

5.  While-we  exist  we  must  expect  irregular  things  (to) 
happen,  and-we  miglit-as-well  accept  them  impartially.  Law- 
yers except  (to-the)  rulings  (of-the)  Court,  but  reporters 
accept  everything  (of-the)  kind.  If-yoii  expect  (to)  dimin- 
ish your  customary  expenses,  you-will  certainly  have  (to) 
change  your  style  of-living.  All  expensive  habits  should-be 
controlled,  but-not  by  extraordinary  means.  Are-you  ac- 
quainted with-Mie  character  (of-the)  defendant's  business? 
Although-he-may-be  deficient  in-his  casl-uccount,  he-may- 
not  be-a  delinquent.  In  February-the  officers  (of-the)  gov- 
ernment completed  their  investigation.  Immoderate  drinking 
immediately  results  in  conduct  unworthy  of  human-nature; 
indulgence  of-this-kind  should  therefore  be-suppressed. 

(i.  Inconsiderate  people  are  usually  inconsistent,  and-not 
capable  of  independent  thought.  Every  individual  should- 
be  discharged  who-is  found  to-be  inexperienced  and-unfit 
for-the  oftice-he  holds.  I-intend  (to)  use  my  influence  (to)  se- 
cure his  nomination,  and-I-consider  myself  an-iufluential  man. 
A-careless  investigation  of  books  is  insufficient  (to)  warrant 
their  introduction.  This-8tate  is  noted  for-its  intelligent 
people,  irrespective  of-its  proportion  of  intemperate  and  irre- 
sponsible subjects.  You-must  carefully  distinguish,  in  Writ- 
ing, between-the  words  January  and  June. 

7.  Every  landlord  should  have  some  knowledge  (of  the) 
laws  ])assed  l)y-tlie  last  Logisljiture.  My  employer  is-a  mag- 
iiaiiiiuous  gentleman,  a-magni(icent  business-man,  and-is  at- 
preseiit  engaged  iu-tlie  manufacture  of-macliim-ry  in  i\Iassa- 
cliusetts,  in-a  large  manufactory  of-his-own.  Please  make-a 
memorandum  of-tliis   fuct,  a-^-it-may-be  ofservice  (to)  you  in 


142  AMERICAN   MANUAI, 


the  future.  Notwithstanding-he  is-not-a  Methodist,  he-thinks 
well  of-Methodism.  A-mistake  is-uot  necessarily  a-niisde- 
meanor,  though  it-may-be-a  misfortune.  As-a  usual-thing 
it-is-not  regarded  as  good  policy  (to)  mortgage  property. 

8.  You-must-not  neglect  practice  for  speed,  for-such  negli- 
gence is  fatal'  (to)  success  as-a  shorthand  writer.  Never  go 
(to)  New- York  unless-you-have  nothing-else  (to)  do,  in  Octo- 
ber, November  or  December.  I-am  somewhat  negligent  about 
my  pecuniary  affairs;  nevertheless  I-have-never  lost  much 
property.  The  locomotive  (of  the)  passenger  train  performed 
its  duty  nobly,  and-enabled-the  people  (to)  participate  in-tbe 
railway  celebration.  He-is-a  very  peculiar  man ;  his  greatest 
peculiarity  being-a  desire  (to)  perform  his  duty  in  every  mu- 
sical performance.  There-is-a  wide  difference  between-a  per- 
pendicular and-a  horizontal  stroke.  Both-tlie  phiintiff  and- 
the  defendant  are  gaining  popularity  by-the  propriety  of- 
their  conduct. 

9.  It-is  scarcely  practicable  (to)  discuss-the' project  with- 
out prejudice.  The  express  messenger  delivers  his  packages 
of-raerchandise  on-the  platform.  You-will-probably  improve 
in  proportion  (to)  your  earnest  endeavors  (to)  proht  by-your 
instruction.  The  public  welfare  should-be-considered  iii-tlie 
publication  of-a  new  book.  Shorthand  publications  shouKl 
receive-a  ready  support  from  every  phonograpiier  who  takes- 
an  interest  in-the  phonographic  art,  and-desires  (to)  qualify 
himself  for  reporting.  For-the  last  quarter  of-a  century  I-have- 
been-a  regular  subscriber  (to)  your  journal,  and-it-has  reached 
me  every  month  free  of  ^jostage  and-witli  great  regularity. 

10.  You-must  observe  propriety  in  matters  of-religion, 
or-else  relinquish  all  hope  of-prosperity  in-this- world.  You- 
might  make-a  memorandum  of-this  remark  for  the-pur pose 
of-testing  its  truth.  He-will  represent  our  county  in-the 
next  legislature,  a.s-he  is-the  chosen  representative  (of  the) 
Reform  party.  Taxation  without  representation  is  supposed 
(to)  have-been-the  cause  (of  the)  American-Revolution.  In- 
an  intelligent  Republic  like-this  all  good  books  in  foreign  Ian- 


OF   PHONOGRAPHY.  143 


guages  should-be  translated  and  republished.  Each  member 
(of  the)  firm  bore  his  respective  share  (of  the)  responsibility, 
although-tlie  manager  alone  was  responsible  for-the  accident. 

11.  A  sermon  on-the  Protestant  Reformation  was  preached 
by-tlie  Rev.  Stranger,  a  .Ronian-Catholic-Priest.  It-gave  gen- 
eral satisfaction  (to-the)  members  of-his-own  church,  but-was- 
not  satisfactory  (to)  supporters  of-Prote.«tantism.  Sometimes 
there-is-not  much  difference  between-a  selfish  reformer  and-a 
religious  fanatic.  The  revelation  of-a  man's  guilt  often  re- 
sults in-a  revolution  of  public  sentiment.  The  qualification 
(of  the)  superintendent  (of  the)  Transportation  Company 
was-a  question  discussed  when-he-was  appointed.  Both-the 
quantity  and  quality  of-telegraphic  dispatches  given  in-tlie 
papers  are-a  surprise  (to)  everybody.  I-came1iere  in  September 
and  remained  several-days,  trying  (to)  find  something  that 
would-be  more  popular  than-the  Temperance-Reform;  but-as 
I-was-a  stranger  I-gave  my  subscription  to-a  religious  news- 
paper, and  made-an  original  suggestion  that  seemed  (to)  sur- 
prise-the  editor. 

12.  If-you  expect  to-write  rapidly  you-must  take  sufficient 
time  (to)  master-the  system  you  study  thoroughly.  You-may 
now  take-the  testimony  in  shorthand  and-transcribe  it  on-the 
type-writer.  The  Bill,  although  important  in-many-respects, 
we  understand,  was  decided  unconstitutional.  We-think  if- 
your  suggestion  had-been  properly  understood-the  proposition 
would-have-been  relinquished.  Such-an  underhanded  trans- 
action as-the  illegal  transfer  of  U.  S.  bonds,  in-order-to-avoid- 
the  punishment  due  his  misconduct,  is  inexcusable,  whoever 
he-may-be.  Tliat-man  cannot  at-once  be  transformed  into-a 
saint.  My  client's  unimproved  property  is-an  unimportant 
consideration,  I  am  reluctant  (to)  say,  in-tlie-way  of  meeting 
liis  obligations.  A  simple  and-uiiiform  method  of  spelling- 
the  English  language,  would  tend  (to)  make-it-the  universal 
luiiguago  (of  tlie)  world.  Whatever  inay-be-said  (of  the) 
gentleman's  official  character,  whenever  and-wherever  it-was 
possiljle  he-made  himself  useful  as-a  private  citizen. 


144 


AMERICAN   MANUAL  OF  PHOXOURAPHY. 


CONTENTS. 


IN'TRODUvTIOX.— Tlie  Old   Style   of   Writii)sr— TIk-  Phon- 
etic I'liiuiplc— Old  Style  Sliortliand — IMioiKjfrrapliy  in 

Brief— Detiiiition  of  Terms     .     ■. ."    .  7-l!t 

Piioiio'];raiiiiic  Ali>iiai)et 2t> 

FIRST  LP:SS0N.— Kxplodent  Consonants L'l 

Long  Vowels 24 

SECOND  LESSOX.— Continuant  Coiisonaiiis 2s 

Liquids,  Nasals,  Andjigues,  Aspirate W 

THIRD  LESSON.— Short  Vowels .:.") 

Coinjilete  \  owel  Scale 'Mi 

Dil)htliongs :ix 

Rules  for  Vocalizing .?{> 

Rules  for  Writing  L  and  R -12 

FOTRTH  LESSOrN.— The  S  and  Z  Cirdc 4") 

Large  Circle.  Loop.s,  etc 4!i 

The  Ci>ndiination  MP  or  MR T)! 

Logograni.s,  or  Word-Signs n2 

FIFTH   LESSON.  — Initial  Hook  for  R r,S 

Special  Scheme  of  Vocalization <>•» 

SIXTH  LESSON.— The  L-Hook  Principle C? 

SEVENTH  LESSON.— Terminal  Hook  for  N (is 

Terminal  Hook  for  F  and  V T2 

EKJHTH  LESSON.— Large  Hook  for  s  h  u To 

Ter  and  Ther  Hook .     .     .     , 77 

NINTH  LESSON.— Brief  W-Diphthonns 81 

W-IIooks ' .S2 

Brief  Y-Diphthongs So 

Modes  of  Writing' the   Aspirate  H s« 

TENTH  LESSON  —The  Half-Length  Principle s}> 

Half-Length  Word-Signs  .     ,    '. !'•< 

ELEVENTH   Lr:SSON.— Preti.ve.s,  Affixes,  etc !»5 

Onn.ssion  of  \'owels yit 

Dissvllahic  Dii.hthongs ICMt 

The  Rule  of  Position l'»l 

Omission  of  Consonants H'2 

TWELFTH  LESSON.— Outlines  of  W<nds KM! 

Contracted    Words ll-'J 

Complete   List  of  Word-Signs IIH 

Exercise  fin    Improvement 12U 

Phraseograpliy 122 

Concerning  Conversation l-^~ 

Exercise  on  Contracted  Wonls 140 


SCIENTIFIC   SHORTHANP, 

THE  ORIGINAL  PITMANIC  SYSTEM. 


AMERICAN    SERIES 

—OF— 

Phonographic  Instruction  Books. 

By  ELIAS  LONGLEY, 

For  twenty-flTe  years  a  Practical  Verbatim  Reporter,  and  Teacher  of  the 
Phonographic  Art. 


I.  THE  AMERICAN  MANUAL  OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 
II.  THE  AMERICAN  PHONOGRAPHIC  DICTIONARY. 
IIL  EVERY    REPORTER'S    OWN    SHORTHAND    DIG- 

TIONARY. 
IV.  COMPEND  OF  PHONOGRAPHY. 
V.  THE  PHONOGRAPHIC  READER  AND  WRITER. 
VI.  SHORTHAND  DICTATION  EXERCISES. 
VII.  THE  AMERICAN  REPORTER'S  GUIDE. 
VIII.  WRITING  EXERCISES. 

Sent  by  mail,  2>t'cp(iid,  on  receipt  of  the  price. 

I.  The  American  Manual  of  Phonography.     A  Com- 
plete Guide  to   the  Acquisition  of   Pitman's  Phonetic 
Shorthand,  with  or  without  a  Master.     12mo.,  144  pages, 
with  stiff  paper  covers,  65  cents  ;  cloth,  75  cents. 
Mr.  Longley's  name   has   been   prominently  connected  with 
phonographic   writing,  reporting,  and   publishing  for  the  last 
twenty -five  years.    His  "  Manual"  was  first  published  in  1854,  and 
continued  for  twenty-five  years  one  of  the  most  popular  Short- 
hand books  in  the  market      In  1879  it  was  thoroughly  revised, 
and  as  the  "A.MtRiCAX    Manual,"  has  become  a  standard  work. 
In  this  new  edition  of  18S2  it  has  again  undergone  careful  re- 
vision.    The  system  is  that  of  Isaac  Pitman  (of  England),  with 
all  his  latest  improvements,  and  those  suggested  and  developed 
by  the  best  American  writers  on  Phonography  and  the  author's 
own  experience  in  the  constant   practice  of  his  profession  for 
many  years. 

The  new  edition  preserves  all  the  characteristic  features  of  the 
\ormer  book, — simplicity  of  style,  classification  and  sequence  of 


[2] 

illiistrations  and  exercises.  The  first  lessons  are  rendered  more 
easy  of  comprehension  by  the  introduction  of  portions  only  of 
the  alphabet  a^a  time,  out  of  which  simple  exercises  are  readily 
formed;  and  by  interlined  translations  of  the  shorthand  in  com- 
mon print,  both  of  which  are  features  to  be  found  in  this  book 
alone. 

The  exceeding  brevity  of  the  English  instruction  books  has 
been  avoided,  while  the  great  prolixity  of  most  American  authors, 
whose  large  and  crowded  pages,  reaching  into  the  hundreds,  has 
been  as  judicially  guarded  against.  In  this  book  of  convenient 
size  the  time  and  memory  of  the  pupil  are  not  taxed  with  un- 
necessary and  impracticable  discussions  of  philosophical  points 
in  relation  to  language  and  its  visual  representation.  He  is  not 
deterred  from  beginning  the  study  by  a  formidable  volume,  nor 
discouraged  by  the  slow  progress  of  memorizing  page  after  page 
of  abstract  principles  and  rules  before  becoming  charmed  with 
the  practice  based  upon  them.  In  its  inviting  pages  principle 
and  practice  go  hand  in  hand. 

An  important  feature  in  the  American  Manual  is  such  an  ar- 
rangement of  the  lessons  that  no  word  or  class  of  words  is  required 
to  be  written  until  the  principle  is  explained  by  which  they  are 
written  in  their  most  approved  forms.  By  this  means  the  student 
is  not  compelled  to  spend  his  time  in  learning  to  write  long  lists 
of  words,  and  then  suffer  the  discouragement  of  having  to  drop 
and  forget  the  forms  thus  learned  and  familiarize  himself  with 
new  and  better  ones.  What  is  once  learned  in  this  book  remains 
a  fixed  fact  with  the  pupil  in  all  his  after  use  of  the  system. 

[^From  the  Cincinnati  Daily  Commercial,  August  11,  1882.] 
A  practical  book  by  a  practical  man.  Mr.  Longley  has  been 
writing  about  and  practicing  phonography  for  thirtj^-five  years. 
He  has  used  it  in  former  years  when  reporting  for  the  Commercial 
and  other  dailies  of  this  city.  The  most  difficult  exercise  of 
phonography  is  taking  a  full  report  of  a  speech  late  at  night  for 
the  next  morning's  paper.  Mr.  Longley  has  done  this  hundreds 
of  times,  and  his  instructions,  therefore,  have  the  highest  value. 
His  Manual  is  for  beginners,  and  it  is  so  clear  and  terse  that  we 
should  think  that  a  close  student  could  become  a  phonographer 
without  any  other  teaching  than  can  be  found  in  its  pages.  Pho- 
nography is  progressive,  and  this  edition  of  the  Manual  is  a  caro- 
tul  revision  for  1882.     The  system  is  Isaac  Pitman's,  with  the 


[3] 

most  helpful  American  improvements.  The  book  leads  the  stu« 
dent  through  graded  exercises,  and  avoids  burdening  his  mind 
with  a  word  or  mark  that  is  not  strictly  necessary.  The  princi- 
ples and  rules  are  always  practical,  and  the  abstract  philosophy 
of  the  language  is  not  gone  into.  The  use  of  phonography  is  in- 
creasing. Even  a  fair  knowledge  of  it  is  worth  much  to  all  who 
act  as  secretaries,  oflBcial  or  private.  There  is  such  a  saving  of 
time  and  labor  in  phonography,  and  the  system  is  so  logical  that 
the  question  comes  up  :  will  it  not  supersede  altogether  the  fin- 
ger-cramping and  needlessly  extended  script  now  employed? 
The  phonetic  missionaries  might  get  along  faster  if  they  attacked 
the  script  before  the  Roman  letters.  A  newspaper  would  not 
have  to  be  very  big  to  contain  all  the  news  in  phonetic  short- 
hand. 

[^From  the  Daily  Advertiser  of  London,  Canada,  whose  Editor  is  an  Ac- 
complished  Phonographer.J 

"  This  interesting  work  proves  to  be  all  that  the  advanced 
sheets  promised — one  of  the  most  useful  works  on  short-hand  be- 
fore the  public.  It  is  really  the  best  exposition  of  Pitman's  Pho- 
nography that  we  have  seen,  combining  the  best  features  of  the 
original  system  with  the  most  practical  impi'ovements  recently 
invented.  It  contains  all  the  information  that  is  required  by  a 
learner  of  the  art,  which  is  far  more  than  can  be  said  of  Pit- 
man's Manuals,  while  it  is  not  overloaded  with  prefaces,  etc.,  like 
some  of  the  other  text-books. 


\_From  D.  A.  Brown,  Teacher  of  Phonography  in  the  Spencerian  Busi* 
ness  College,  Washington,  D.  C] 

"  Your  little  book  seems  to  me  to  be  the  very  best  for  learners 
that  has  yet  been  issued.  It  is  a  clear,  honest  exposition  of  what 
phonography  is  and  can  do.  The  matter  of  the  book  is  excellent, 
in  its  simplicity  of  arrangement,  fullness  of  suggestion,  method- 
ical and  practical  presentation  of  the  principles  of  the  art,  and 
in  its  helpfulness  to  the  unpracticod  student.  The  typographical 
execution  is  faultless,  and  reflects  credit  upon  the  author's  knowl- 
edge '  how  to  do  it'  in  the  printer's  art. 

"Permit  me  also  to  familiarly  say  that  the  whole  tone  and 
tendency  of  the  book  are  pure  and  helpful,  and  show  a -careful 
scissors,  or  a  very  wise,  honest  head  and  heart  in  the  composition 
of  matter  for  the  reading  and  writing  exercises. 

"  It  gives  me  pleasure  to  write  these  words  of  commendation 
on  3,  piece  of  work  that  merits  more  praise  from  a  more  discerning 


[4] 

judgment,  and  which  1  have  no  doubt  is  already  widely  appr^ 
elated. 

{^From  S.  H.  East,  Teacher  of  Phonography  in  the  Central  Normal  Col- 
lege,  at  Danville,  Ind.^ 

"I  take  pleasure  in  saying  that  I  have  used  your  'American 
Manual'  in  my  phonographic  classes  for  some  time  past,  and 
consider  it  the  best  instruction  book  on  shorthand  published.  I 
formerly  used  Isaac  Pitman's  books,  but  consider  your  American 
Manual  -ar  superior,  either  for  classes  or  for  private  students.  I 
shall  continue  to  use  the  American  Manual  in  the  Central  Nor- 
mal College.'' 

II.  The  American  Phonographic  Dictionary.  Ex- 
hibiting the  Correct  and  Actual  Shorthand  Forms  for 
all  the  useful  words  of  the  English  Language,  about  50,000 
in  number,  and,  in  addition,  many  Foreign  Terms ;  also, 
the  best  Shorthand  Forms  for  2,000  Geographical  J^ames, 
and  as  many  Family,  Pei-sonal,  and  noted  Fictitious  Names. 
12mo.,  16  -f  368  pages,  cloth,  $2.50. 

In  the  compilation  and  phonographic  preparation  of  this  work 
the  author  has  spent  three  years  of  study  and  labor.  It  is  the 
first  dictionary  published  in  the  United  States,  in  which  the 
shorthand  forms  of  words  are  given;  and  it  contains  nearly 
twice  as  many  words  as  Isaac  Pitman's  (English)  Phonographic 
Dictionary,  now  out  of  print. 

That  such  a  work  was  needed  has  been  sadly  evident  to  every 
one  who  has  had  an  opportunity  to  observe  the  great  diversity 
in  the  writing  of  even  the  most  skillful  phonographers.  Hereto- 
fore there  has  been  no  standard  to  which  they  could  turn  and 
see  at  a  glance  how  words  of  doubtful  construction  should  be 
written,  in  accordance  with  principle,  and  as  the  result  of  long 
practice,  by  those  who  have  made  a  systematic  study  of  the  ai*t. 
The  attempts  of  other  authors  to  "indicate"  by  a  complicated 
"nomenclature"  how  fifty  thousand  words  shall  be  written,  have 
not  been  eminently  satisfactory.  Every  one  knows  the  value  of 
the  eye  in  enabling  the  memory  to  recall  the  forms  of  words  in 
common  print,  and  in  reproducing  them  with  the  pen.     It  is 


[5] 

much  more  important  for  the  phonographic  student  to  see  and 
copy  tlie  shorthand  forms  of  words,  in  oi'der  to  understand  and 
remember  them. 

The  style  of  phonography  presented  in  this  dictionary  is  es- 
sentially that  of  Isaac  Pitman,  the  inventor  of  the  art,  so  far  im- 
proved, by  the  use  of  a  number  of  features  that  have  been 
developed  by  the  best  American  writers,  as  to  enable  them  to 
keep  pace  with  the  lightning  speed  of  Yankee  eloquence.  En- 
glish phonographers,  therefore,  will  find  this  work  of  great  value 
in  enabling  them  to  abbreviate  their  lengthy  outline  of  words, 
and  thereby  increase  their  speed. 

The  following  are  some  of  the  advantages  to  be  derived  from 
the  use  of  the  dictionary.  1.  It  will  enable  the  student  of 
phonography  to  make  more  rapid  progress  in  his. study  than  has 
heretofore  been  possible,  for  he  will  need  to  waste  no  time  in 
experimenting  and  changing  to  secure  the  best  forms  of  words. 
2.  By  the  etymological  instead  of  alphabetical  arrangement  of 
words,  the  student  will  readily  acquire  the  habit  of  writing  the 
various  modifications  of  words  in  uniform  ways,  instead  of  leai'n- 
ing  to  write  each  word  separately.  3.  in  addition  to  giving 
the  full  phonogra2)hic  forms  of  words,  the  briefest  contractions 
for  many  thousands  of  the  most  frequently  recurring  words  are 
given  which  will  enable  the  learner,  from  the  start,  to  be  making 
desirable  progress  in  the  advanced  style  of  the  art. 

"  The  specimen  pages  of  your  forthcoming  Phonographic  Dic- 
tionary have  been  received,  and  examined  with  pleasure.  The 
pleasure  was  increased  by  reason  of  tlie  fact  that  I  am  saved  the 
task  which  I  had  laid  upon  myself  of  urging  you  to  bring  out 
some  book  for  general  readers  that  would  train  them  in  reading 
and  writing  the  best  phonographic  forms  of  words.  The  work 
which  you  have  in  hand  will  prove  of  far  more  value  than  any 
thing  that  I  might  have  suggested.  I  hope  that  you  may  reap  a 
double  reward  for  this  great  work — a  fair  pecuniary  reward,  and 
the  greater  reward  of  seeing  the  cause  to  which  you  have  given 
the  l>est  years  of  a  well-spent  lil'e  flourish  beyond  all  precedent. 
I  shall  look  earnestly  for  the  new  book,  but  I  hope  you  will  not 
permit  me,  or  any  one  olse.  to  hasten  its  appearance  by  a  single 
day,  at  the  expense  of  fnst-elass  work. 

"  Prof.  Charm:s  8.  Royci:.  Colleffeville,  Pa." 


[6] 

III.  Every  Reporter's  Own  Shorthand  Dictionary, 
The  same  as  the  above,  but  printed  upon  vniting  paper,  leav- 
ing out  the  Shorthand  Forms,  and  giving  blank  lines  op- 
posite  each  word,  for  the  purpose  of  enabling  writers  of  all 
systems  of  Shorthaiid  to  put  upon  record,  for  convenient  refer- 
ence, the  peculiar  Avord-fbrras  they  employ.  12mo.,  4  -f 
368  pages,  cloth,  S2.00. 

The  author  of  the  "American  Phonographic  Dictionary."  at 
the  solicitation  of  many  phonographers,  and  others  who  write 
systems  of  shorthand  different  from  his  own,  has  generouslly 
allowed  an  edition  of  his  work  to  be  printed  "in  blank"  for 
their  use.  The  plan  of  his  book,  and  tlie  process  employed  for 
printing  in  the  phonographic  signs,  are  such  as  to  allow  the 
typic  portion  to  be  used  for  any  other  style  of  Phonography,  or 
any  other  system  of  shorthand  indeed,  as  well  as  for  his  own. 

The  facility  with  which  the  followers  of  Isaac  and  Benn  Pit- 
man, Graham,  Munson,  Burns,  Lindsley,  Scovill  and  Cross,  may 
herein-  record  for  their  own  ready  reference  or  that  of  their 
pupils,  their  peculiar  shorthand  forms  for  words,  places  them  in 
almost  as  favorable  a  position,  in  this  respect,  as  are  those  who 
accept  as  their  standard  the  printed  forms  of  the  "American 
Phonographic  Dictionary."  The  pages  are  printed  on  good  writ- 
ing paper,  and  the  work  of  writing  in  the  shorthand  signs  for  the 
words  will  be  found  an  interesting  pastime  to  the  critical  steno- 
grapher, as  it  will  also  be  an  instructive  exercise  to  the  learner. 

The  arrangement  of  the  words,  though  not  strictly  alphabetic, 
is  sufficiently  near  it  to  enable  one  to  find  any  word  readily ; 
while  the  etymological  classification,  beginning  each  family  with 
the  root-woi'd,  is  of  great  advantage  to  the  student.  Thus,  be 
ginning  with  next  to  the  last  word  in  the  alphabetical  arrange- 
ment, we  have:  edify,  edited,  edifier,  edifying,  edification,  edificatory; 
instead  of  the  ordinary  dictionary  arrangement:  edification, 
edificatory,  edified,  edifier,  edify,  edifying.  We  have,  also :  inspire, 
inspired,  inspiring,  inspirable,  inspiration,  inspiratory ;  instead  of  the 
unsystematic  order :  inspirable,  inspiration,  inspiratory,  inspire,  in- 
spired,  inspirer,  inspiring. 


[7] 

By  following  this  entymological  arrangement  the  learner  will 
first  write  the  simple  root-form  of  each  family  of  words,  and 
then  build  upon  that  through  all  its  modifications;  and  he  will 
soon  discover  the  uniformity  observed  in  writing  the  termina- 
tions :  -ed,  -ing,  -able,  -ahhness,  -ability,  -atory,  -ance,  -tioyi,  etc.,  and 
he  will  have  no  hesitation  in  writing  the  same  terminations  to 
any  root-word.  Indeed  he  will  naturally  acquire  the  habit  of 
writing  the  various  modifications  of  words  in  uniform  ways,  in- 
stead of  learning  to  write  each  word  separately. 

As  a  mere  copy-book,  therefore,  in  which  to  write  a  complete 
course  of  instruction,  the  pages  of  this  work  will  prove  of  great 
service  to  the  shorthand  pupil. 

In  addition  to  the  full  forms  of  words,  there  is  room  in  most 
of  the  blank  lines  for  the  expert  stenographer  to  enter  his  most 
contracted  forms,  and  to  add  to  the  number  as  he  finds  it  neo. 
essary  to  abbreviate  special  terms.  He  will  thus,  in  a  short  time, 
compile  for  himself  an  invaluable  book  of  reference,  which  he 
may  also  use  in  teaching  his  assistants  and  pupils  to  write  in  ex- 
act accordance  with  his  own  style. 

IV.  Compend  of  Phonography  :  Presenting  a  table  of 
all  Alphabetic  Combinations,  Hooks,  Circles,  Loops,  etc.,  at 
one  view ;  also,  Complete  Lists  of  Word-signs  and  Contracted 
Word-forms,  with  Rules  for  Contracting  Words.  For  the 
use  of  Writers  of  all  styles  of  Phonography.  12mo.  32 
pages.  25 

This  is  designed  to  be  used  as  a  pocket  companion,  for  the 
ready  reference  of  students,  to  ascertain  the  briefest  and  best 
forms  for  coijstantly  recurring  words,  and  as  an  aid  in  reading 
one's  notes. 

V.  The  Phonographic  Reader  and  Writer.  Con- 
taining Reading  Exerci.«es,  with  translations  on  opposite 
pages,  which  form  Writing  Exercises.  12mo.,  48  pages. 
Paper,  25  cents;  limp  cloth, 

This  little  book  should  be  in  the  pocket  of  every  phonographic 
student  until  he  can  read  and  write  every  line  without  hesitation. 
It  is  the  best  substitvite  he  can  have  for  the  constant  i^resence  of 
an  attentive  teacher.     Though  he  may  have  studied  the  lessons 


[8]' 

inoroughly,  he  will  find  it  slow  work  reading  phonography  until 
he  has  learned  to  recognize  words  by  their  form.  To  attain  this 
skill  it  is  necessary  to  read  a  great  deal ;  and  to  do  this  one 
should  not  spend  much  time  in  analyzing  the  structure  of  words, 
or  guessing  at  them  as  a  whole.  In  the  absence  of  a  teacher 
to  tell  him,  he  needs  an  ever-present  guide  to  save  him  from 
unnecessary  waste  of  time.  This  prompt  and  faithful  guide  he 
will  find  in  this  little  book,  in  the  convenient  key  to  every  word, 
on  the  same  or  opposite  page. 

VI.  Shorthand  Dictation  Exercises.  Couuted  and 
timed  for  advanced  Learners  in  any  System.  12mo.  72 
pages.     25  cents. 

"This  book  will  save  time  and  trouble  to  teachers  and  stu- 
dents, without  respect  to  system.  It  is  ingeniously  arran^'ed  for 
five  rates  of  speed,  namely  50,  75,  100,  125,  and  150  words  per 
minute.  We  predict  popularity  for  the  '  Exercises.' " — Phono- 
graphic Magazine. 

VII.  The  American  Reporter's  Guide.  Containing 
the  most  complete  list  of  phrases  ever  published ;  also,  Ex- 
haustive Lists  of  all  Contracted  words  used  in  reporting ; 
supplemented  with  ample  exercises  in  the  briefest  style  of 
writing,  with  a  key  to  tlie  same  in  common  print  on  the 
opposite  pages.  -22mo.     248  pages.     $2.00. 

The  author's  long  experience  of  twenty-five  years  in  practical 
reporting,  both  on  newspaper  work  and  as  an  official  court  re- 
porter, and  his  critical  study  of  all  other  works  on  the  subject, 
enable  him  to  bring  to  the  compilation  of  a  new  book  on  this 
most  difficult  art  nnequaled  qualifications  for  accomplishing 
well  his  task.  Having  within  the  past  year  retired  from  the  ac- 
tive pursuit  of  his  reportorial  profession,  he  is  devoting  the  best 
efibrts  of  his  ripe  years  to  the  production  of  a  volume  that  will 
not  only  be  a  credit  to  his  reputation  as  a  phonographer,  but  a 
most  reliable  and  helpful  guide  to  the  thousands  of  young  re- 
porters whose  accurate  and  skillful  services  will  be  required  in 
the  immediate  future. 

VIII.  Writing  Exercises.  For  gaining  speed  in  Phonog- 
raphy, the  Exercises  are  printed  contiguous  to  the  lines  on 
which  they  are  to  be  written,  and  are  interspersed  with 
Word-Signs,  Phrases,  and  Sentences,  beginning  with  the 
first  lesson.     64  pages.     25  cents. 

The  Same.     Larger  edition.     64  pages.     25  cents. 

KOBEET  CLAEKE  &  CO.,  Publishers. 

Cincinnati. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

Los  Angeles 

This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


Form  L9-10m-3,'48(A7920)444 


UNIVERSITY  of  CALIFORNIA 

AT 

LOS  ANGELES 

UBRARY 


Z36      longley-  p 

L86a    American  manual 
phoni 


„U,iJ .SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 


A  000  576  283  6 


Z56 

L86a 

1891 


